Document 4QB5dpKRmOVDMr4XEw3xdRzrQ

* * * ` jy : - ^;f^e.' r..>1-/ Power Dynamfcs, Inc. ^ ; Harvey, LA , i t'V-i . f t `' Electrohvdraulic ContreLSystem Retrofit G.E. Steam X^ri^^^S'o. I How Chemical, Plaquemine, L.*1 >* . 4>/ 'V' i: Reference Manual Hydraulic Power l nit & Electrohvdraulic Actuators l September 1994 DO A 134790 CONFTDFNTTAL List of Drawings Drawing Title Cylinder Specification Control Drawing (T* Bore Stop Valve Actuator) Hydraulic Control System Operational Schematic Hydraulic Control System Power Unit Arrangement Power Dynamics/Dow Chemical 2.50" Bore x 8.00" Stroke (For Extraction Valve) Power Dvnamics/Dow Chemical 3.25" Bore x 13 00" Stroke (For Throttle Valve) Power Dynamics/Dow Chemical (Stop Valve Actuator Control Manifold) Drawing No. 1145291 CM93-36-1 CM93036-2 1100185 1100186 T-30406 Vendor Parker Power Dynamics Power Dynamics Parker Parker Parker DO A 134791 CONFIDENTIAL Introduction This manual provides descriptive operation and maintenance instructions for standard Hydraulic Power Units, manufactured by thr Parkm HannifliT Corporation. Any additional information may be obtained from -referencing Hie Unit's Mudt?l fUembe: and Oei iart Nui iibewtaii iped ui i ihu. neaei iiOIT HamoplatOror by contacting your local authorized Parker Distributor. OyjdAMKS Some of the Information in this manual may not apply to your power unit. Information on custom units may require sen/ice and application information from other sources. Warning It is imperative that personnel involved in the installation, service, and operation of the power unit be familiar with how the equipment is to be used. They should be aware of the limitations of the system and its component parts; and have knowledge of good hydraulic practices m terms of safety, installation, and maintenance. Description The standard Hydraulic Power Unit usually consists of a JIC. *L" shaped, or vertical reservoir all of wnich incorporate sump dram, oil level gage, filler/preather assembly and spare return connections. The pump will be coupled to the motor using either an integral close coupled configuration or flexible shaft coupling Custom type power units may have heat exchangers tor oil cooling; pressure or return filters, oil immersion heaters, directional valves, and other pressure and flow control valves, or monitoring instrumentation. Preparation For Use Unpacking and Checking The Power Unit is mounted on skids and carefully packed for shipment. Do not remove it from the skid until it has been carefully checked for damage that may have occurred in transit. Report all damage immediately to the earner and send a copy to the vendor. All open ports on the Power Unit were plugged at the factory to prevent the entry of contamination. These plugs must not be removed until just before piping connections are made to the unit. St rag If the Power Unit is not going to be installed immediately, it should be stored indoors, covered with waterproof sheet, and ail open ports plugged. If long term storage is expected (6 months or more) we recommend filling the reservoir completely with clean hydraulic fluid to prevent the entry of moisture. Removing from Shipping Skids Vertical Power Units should be removed from the skid by wrapping a heavy duty nylon strap around the base of the motor mounting feet. This strap should be firmly secured to the lift truck forks when unit is lifted. Small horizontal style Power Units should be moved with a fork-lift truck, with 2x4 boards under the reservoir belly, to distribute and steady the load. Larger horizontal style Power Units have lifting holes in the reservoir end plates. Extra heavy 1 1/2" pipes can be inserted into the lifting holes for allowing movement with a fork-lift truck, l-shaped reservoirs are provided with clearance and cross braces under the base plate for movement with a fork-lift truck. Installation Locating Power Unit The unit should oe installed indoors, and preferably in a dean, dry environment with an ambient temperature of 60 to 100:F. The unit can be installed outdoors if the reservoir was provided with optional weatherproot construction, and provisions were made for extreme temperature conditions. The reservoir can be secured to the floor or base using the four mounting holes located on the reservoir legs. Service Connections Water (If water cooled heat exchanger has been provided) Connect the water supply to the inlet of the heat exchanger, with a shut-off valve and strainer (if not supplied by Parker). If a Temperature Control Valve (Model WTC*') has been provided, it also should be installed on the inlet side. The outlet of the heat exchanger should be connected directly to the facility dram system. On single pass heat exchangers the water connections should be installed as shown below. On multi-pass heat exchanger the water flow direction is not important. (See fig. 1) 1 DO A 13479? CONFIDENTIAL Figure 1 Service Connections (Cont.) Electrical Connect the pump motor to the power source following good practices as outlined in the National Electric Code and any local codes which may apply. Verify that the available voltage is the same as the voltage identified on the motor nameplate. Most motors have dual voltage ratings, so verify that the leads in the conduit box have been oonnected together as defined on the motor nameplate to match the facility power source available. If Solenoid valves, pressureriemperature switches, or oil immersion heaters have been provided on the power unit, refer to the component name tag or other service information in this manual for operating voltage and ratings. Supply and Return Connections Complete all necessary interconnecting piping between the power unit and hydraulic actuators Tne line sizes should be determined based on oti flow, operating pressure and allowable pressure drop between the power unit and actuator. Warning Check to insure that the proper rated hose or pipe is used on pressure lines. One of the key ingredients for good service and long life from a hydraulic system is cleanliness, and since most dirt infiltrates a hydraulic system during installation, we recommend the following: a) All open ports on the power unit, cylinders, etc. must remain plugged with tape or plastic plugs until just before the hydraulic connections are made. b) All interconnecting tubing, pipe, or hose should be clean, and free of rust, scale and dirt. The ends of all connectors should be plugged until just before they are to be installed in the system. c) All openings in the reservoir such as the filler breather or access end covers holes must remain closed during installation. d) If Teflon tape, or pipe dope is used, be sure it doesn't extend beyond the first thread of the pipe fitting. Reservoir Filling The reservoir must be filled with clean fluid thru the filler cap on the reservoir. The type o< fluid must be compatible with tne seals used on the power unit, and must comply with the recommendations of the manufacturers of the component parts. Refer to the component manufacturer's catalog for fluid requirements The cleanliness of the fluid going into the reservoir is very important, and in some cases, even new oil out of the drum is not adequate. We recommend that any fluid being transferred into the reservoir be done with a transfer pump with a 10 micron fitter installed. A Parker filter cart is available for this purpose Start-up Procedure f) Open any ball or gate valve (if applicable) located m the pump suction line. 2) Back the system relief valve and/or pump pressure compensator adjustment knob out. so that the pressure will be near zero during the initial start. Note: If the power unit has been provided with a variable displacement pump or any piston pump (V-Pak), the pump case should be filled with clean oil prior to priming. In most cases this can be accomplished by disconnecting the pump case dram line and pouring the oil into the pump case drain port. DO A 134793 2 CONFIDENTIAL Maintenance Suggestions (Cont.) Isolating Trouble-Spots To determine which components are "running hot' and overheating the oil. feel the outlet fittings and lines at the valves, pumps and motors. If the oil temperature is normal going into a component but hot coming out, that could be one of the potential problem areas. A sticking valve can cause excessive heat. If a spool does not return promptly to the neutral position, the pump flow will be dumped continuously. This builds up heat rapidly. If a relief valve is set too low. part of the oil will be dumped across the valve with every cycle. This too. generates excessive heat. Even when all valves are set properly, they may not be operating well because of worn orifices or seals Always remove and check the hot components first Check Oil Samples Periodically Checking oil temperature periodically is gooa preventive maintenance So too is the practice of periodically Siphoning an oil sample from tne reservoir, and comparing it with a sample of clean new oil Oil that has been running too hot will look darker and teei thinner than new od ft will also smell burned Normally it will contain more contaminants, because hot oil leads to accelerated wear of component parts Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Areas Dirty Oil 1) Components not properly servicing. cleaned after 2) Inadequate screening in fill pipe. 3) Air breather left off. (No air breather provided or insufficient protection of air breather.) 4) Tank not properly sealed. 5) Pipe lines not properly covered while servicing machine. 6) Improper tank baffles not providing settling basin for heavy materials. 7) Filter dirty or ruptured. Fire resistant fluids 1) Incorrect seals cause binding spools. 2) Paint, varnish or enamel in contact with fluids can cause sludge deposits on filters and around seal areas. 3) Electrolytic action is possible with some metals. Usually zinc or cadmium. 4) Improper mixtures can cause heavy sludge formations. 5) High temperatures adversely affect some of the fluids, particularly the water base fluids. 6) Adequate identificatiqn of tanks containing these fluids should be provided so that they will be refilled with the proper media. 7) As with mineral base oils, nuisance leaks should be remedied at once. 8) Make certain replacement parts are compatible with fluid media Foaming Oil 1) Tank ime not returned below fluid level 2) Broken pipe 31 Line ieh out between a bulkhead coupling and the bottom of tne tank aner cleaning 4) inadequate baffles m reservoir. 5) Fluid contaminated with incompatible foreign matter 6) Suction leak to pump aerating oil. 7) Lack of antH>foammg additives Moisture in Oils 1) Coolmg cods not below fluid level. 2) Cold water lines fastened directly against hot tank causing condensation within tank. 3) Soluble oil solution splashing into poorly sealed tanks or fill pipes left open. 4) Moisture in cans used to replace fluid in tanks. 5) Extreme temperature differential in certain geographical locations. 6) Drain not provided at lowest point in tank to remove water collected over possibly long operating periods. Overheating of System 1) Relief valve set too close to compensator pressure setting. 2) Water shut off or heat exchanger clogged. 5 DO A \04794 CONFIDENTIAL Troubleshooting (Cont.) 3) Continuous operation at relief setting. a. Stalling under load, etc. b. Fluid viscosity too high or too low. 4) Excessive slippage or internal leakage. a. Check stall leakage past pump, motors and cylinders. b. Fluid viscosity too low, 5) Reservoir sized too small. 6) Case drain line from pressure compensated pump returning oil too close to suction line. a. Re-pipe case drain line to opposite side of reservoir baffling. 7) Pipe, tube or hose I.D. too small causing high velocity. 8) Valving too small, causing high velocity. 9) Improper air circulation around reservoir. 10) System relief valve set too high. 11) Power unit operating in direct sunlight or ambient temperature is too high. Foreign matter sources in the circuit 1) Pipe scale not properly removed. 2) Sealing compound (pipe dope. Teflon tape) allowed to get inside fittings. 3) Improperly screened fill pipes and air breathers 4) Burrs inside piping. 5) Tag ends of packing coming loose 6) Seal extrusions from pressure higher than compatible with the seal or gasket. 7) Human element...not protecting components while being repaired and open lines left unprotected 8) Wipers or boots not provided on cylinders or rams where necessary. 9) Repair parts and replacement components not properly protected while stored in repair depot (Rust and other contaminants) Troubleshooting Pumps Pump makes excessive noise 1) Check for vacuum leaks in the suction line. (Such as leak in fitting or damaged suction line.) 2) Check for vacuum leaks in the pump shaft seal if the pump is internally drained. Flooding connections with the fluid being pumped may cause the noise to stop or abate momentarily. This will locate the point of air entry. 3) Check alignment with drive mechanism. Misalignment will cause premature wear and subsequent high noise level in operation. 4) Check manufacturer's specifications relative to wear possibilities and identification of indications of wear as high operating noise level, etc. 5) Check compatibility of fluid being pumped against manufacturer's recommendations. 6) Relief or unloading valve set too high. Use reliable gauge to check operating pressure. Relief valve may have been set too high with a damaged pressure gauge. Check various unloading devices to see that they are properly controlling the pump delivery. 7) Aeration of fluid in reservoir (return lines above fluid level) 8) Worn or sticking vanes (vane type pump). 9) Worn cam ring (vane type pump) 10) Worn or damaged gears and housing (gear pump). 11) Worn or faulty bearing. 12) Reversed rotation 13) Cartridge installed backwards or improperly. 14) Plugged or restricted suction line or suction strainer 15) Plugged reservoir filler breather. 16) Oil viscosity too high or operating temperature too low. 17) Air leak in suction line or fittings may cause irregular movement of hydraulic system. 18) Loose or worn pump parts. 19) Pump being driven in excess of rated speed. 20) Air leak at pump shaft seal. 21) Oil level too low and drawing air in through inlet. 22) Air bubbles in intake oil. 23) Suction filter too small or too dirty. 24) Suction line too small or too long. 26) Pump housing bolts loose or not properly torqued. 6 DO A 134795 OONFTDFNTTAl Tr ubleshooting Pumps (Cont.) Pump failure to deliver fluid 1) Low fluid level in reservoir. 2) Oil intake pipe suction strainer plugged. 3) Air leak in suction line and preventing priming. 4) Pump shaft turning too slowly. 5) Oil viscosity too high. 6) Oil lift too high. 7) Wrong shaft rotation. 8) Pump shaft or parts broken. 9) Dirt in pump. 10) Vanable delivery pumps (improper stroke) Oil leakage around pump 1) Shaft seal worn. 2) Head of oil on Suction pipe connection connection leaking. 3) Pump housing bolts loose or improperly torQuec 41 Case dram line too small or restricted (shah sea leading) Excessive pump wear i) Abrasive dm. in the hyo-auiic oil being circuiaied through the system 2, Oil viscosity too low 3/ System pressure eiceeds pump rating 4i Pump misalignment or bett drive too tight 5) Air being drawn in through miet of pump Pump parts inside housing broken 1) Seizure due to lack of oil 2) Excessive system pressure above maximum pump rating. 3) Excessive torquing of housing bolts. 4) Solid matter being drawn in from reservoir and wedged in pump. Troubleshooting Solenoid Valves Solenoid failures 1) Voltage too low. If voltage is not sufficient to complete the stroke of the solenoid, it will bum out the coil. 2) Voltage too high. Excessive voltage can also burn out coils. 3) Signal to both solenoids of a double solenoid valve simultaneously. One or both of the solenoids will be unable to complete their stroke and will burn out. (Make certain the electrical signal is ihterlocked so that this condition cannot exist.) 4) Mechanical damage to leads. (Short circuit, open connections, etc.) 5) Tight spool or other mechanical paijs of the valve being actuated can prevent the solenoid from completing its stroke and subsequently burning out. 6) Replacement springs too heavy in valve. Overloads solenoid and shortens life. 7) D*rty contacts may not supply sufficient current to so*enoc to satisfy inrush demands. 81 Low vohage direct current solenoids may be affected by low battery capacity on cold mornings 0*ectty after starting cold engine. (DC) 9i Long t*o unes to low voltage solenoids may cause su*c*nt voltage drop to cause erratic 0O**atn I Solenoid valve fails to operate f> is the*# an electrical signal to the solenoid or ooeratv^g oev<' Is the voltage too low' (Check with voltmeter test vgnt in emergency.) 2) t* me Suocvy to the pilot body is orificed. is the rife# restncted' (Remove orifice and check for tore^n matter Flushing is sometimes necessary because o' floating impediment.) 3) Has toreoh matter jammed the main spool? (Remove end caps and see that main spool is free in its movement remember that there will be a quantity of fluid escaping when the cap is removed and provide a container to catch it.) 4) Is pilot pressure available? Is the pilot pressure adequate' (Check with gauge on main pressure input port for internally piloted types and in the supply line to the externally piloted type.) 5) Is pilot drain restricted? (Remove pilot drain and let the fluid pour into an open container while the machine is again tried for normal operation. Small lines are often crushed by machine parts banging against them causing a subsequent restriction to fluid flow.) 7 DO A 134796 CONFIDENTIAL Troubleshooting Solenoid Valves (Cont.) 6) Is pilot tank port connected to main tank port where pressures are high enough to neutralize pilot input pressure? (Combine pilot drain and pilot tank port and check for operation with the combined flow draining into an open container...block line to main tank from pilot valve...if this corrects the situation, reroute pilot drain and tank line.) 7) Are solenoids improperly interlocked so that a signal is provided to both units simultaneously? (Put test light on each solenoid lead in parallel and watch for simultaneous lighting...check electrical interlock. This condition probably burns out more solenoids than any other factor.) 8) Has mounting pad been warped from external heating? (Loosen mounting bolts slightly and see if valve functions. End caps can also be removed and check for tight spool.) 9) Is fluid excessively hop (Check for localized heating which may indicate an internal leak...check reservoir temperature and see if it is within machine specifications.) 10) Is there foreign matter in the fluid media causing gummy deposits? (Check for contamination...make certain seals and plumbing are compatible with the type of fluid being used.) 11) Is an adequate supply of fluid being delivered to actuate the load? (Many times there is sufficient pressure to shift the valve but not enough to actuate the work load. Check pump supply pressure and volume if necessary...physical measurement of flow through relief valve with units blocked may be necessary.) 12) Check circuit for possible interlocks on pressure sources to valve or to pilot. n4797 8 DO A dfntial OOMF T Ordering Code Cartridges 2-Way Slip-In Cartridges Series CE and C Cartridge Nominal Size Variation Poppet Spring Orifice Seals Design Series Code 016 025 032 040 050 063 oeo too Description NG 16 NG2S NG 32 NG 40 NG 50 NG 63 NG 60 NG toe Descrewr normally closed . ItinoifQ O0PQ0OPM4 WfhpOW*MI normady aaen W'tirt Aopocer e t* 9 tp-mg S v u o~ asytcrNGU No- m- poope- C ` *c x. hgu Code A L N* s* u* Pressure wimoi/t spring 0 1 oar 0 504' t { Da* 4 ooe* no< to- OOOV norme op*- Code N V E Material Buna N Viton Ethyiene-Propytene Code w tiai 01 1 i----------i * A a;A a* ; 4 a ' ! Or- a. * ; m * 4 : . 4 09 ; "O' *0" NO ' C am; iOC Cod* 9 Desenction pMgsamoxy.ontice i or w t M e'er coo* amo<es 0"t<* demote' nevHemontte 21 i|*Ost or*<e 0-4 0 B mm o'-t.r o-i 0 mm opr' ncc*jg to- ot*'- o*rf*co sizes see page 49 Cover m Sfrofc# A*v**m+m * O Seats Design Senes Coo* 016 025 032 040 050 063 oeo 100 Code A B C Description NG 16 NG 25 NG 32 NG 40 NG 50 NG 63 NG 80 Iv<w sc*** 4?c*v noo fcnoe wf* rptcnr knoe with latenei and '3E oo * not tor sizes 63 to 100 * not to' sues 3? to '00 Coot a N O* * f Maiena' Buna N I Viton 1 Etnytene-Ptopyiene NG 100 Descnption with port *X' for external piloting as "A", with stroke adjustment Description plug without oniice pugwimontice. cooe denotes oniice diameter m lemns oi millimeter Examples onticedia 0.8 mm oniice dia. 2.0 mm Code 00 lor titling ol pilot function open, no oniice. no plug 99 Code N v E for other orifice sizes see page 49 for positioning and sizing of orifices see page 46 to 50 Parker Hannifin Corporation EBHHydraulic Valve Division 46 Elvna Ohio 440TS DO A 134798 C0NFIDFNTTA1 Spare Parts for Covers 2-Way Slip-In Cartridges Series CE and C C032BY Spare Parts Position Nr Description C016 0*Rmg Bona N 552-90 5000902 16 Viton ' V 747-90 5001012 2-010 34 O-Ring Viton 5001036 2-113 35 backup nng N 300-90 5001135 8-113 O-Ring Buna N SS2-90 5000943 36 Viton V 747-90 5001047 2-124 37 Glyd Ring O-Ring Buna N 552-90 38 Viton V 747-90 * S 55043-0100-10 C025 5000904 5001014 2-012 5001036 2-113 5001135 6-113 5000943 5001047 2-124 C032 500090S 5001015 2-013 5001033 2-110 '- 5000943 5001047 2-124 5001262 * 5000932 5001036 2-113 PanN umber CO40 COSO 5000931 5001035 2-112 5001037 2-114 5000931 500103S 2 112 5001037 2-114 C063 5000935 5001039 2-116 5001041 2-118 COSO 5000973 5001068 2-215 5001048 2-125 C10Q 5000973 5001068 2-215 5001090 2-129 5001143 8-129 - Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 51 Electrohydraulic do a 134799 CONFIDENTIAL inches Dimensions (Millimeters) Cartridge Only Needle Valves Series NV101 Cartridge in Body Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 DO A 134800 CONFIDENTIAL- Check Valves Series CV101 Poppet-Type Check Valve Application The CV101 Series Check Valves allow free flow in one direction while preventing flow in the reverse direction. They can be used to isolate portions of a hydraulic circuit or to provide a free flow path around a restrictive valve. ---Free Flow-- Operation Pressure on the inlet of the check creates a force against the poppet, pushing it off its seat and permitting free flow. Reverse flow through the check is blocked by the poppet. Features Hardened operating parts for long life Fully guided poppet for smooth operation Cartridge design installation Data See tne Installation Information section of this catalog for specific recommendations pertaining to system cleanliness, fluids, seals and other important factors relative to the proper installation and use of these products Performance Curve Free Flow vs. Pressure Drop (Through cartridge only For performance of bodies, see section MV) Cartridge Valve Specifications Raiec Flow Mai Operating Pressure Mai Leanage at Raiec Pressure 15 GPM (56 25 UM) 3500 PSl (245 Bar) 5 {Jrops'min (1 3 ccmin ) Operating Temp Range (Amount) CanriOge Matena1 Booy Material Filtration Mounting Cavity -40;F to - 200*F (Nitrile) -25'F to * 250`F (Viton) aii pans steel An operating pans hardened steel Steel ISO Code 16'13. SAE Class 4 or better No Restrictions Common Cavity No Cl0-2 (See Cavity Details section) Construction 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 GPM o-------------------------------------------------------------- - 7.6 15.1 22.7 30.3 37.9 45 4 53.0 606 L/M Free Flow Outlet (2) & FREE FLOW o Free Flow Outlet (2) PRESSURE DROP For additional information - call your local 78 Park r Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. DO A 134801 CONFIDENTIAL Inches Dimensions (Millimeters) Cartridge Only Free Flow Inlet(1) --.622 Out -- (15 8) Ini] * Te**0- ANGlE Ordering Information Check Valves Series CV101 Cartridge in Body Hydraulic Vaiv Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 DO A 13480? conftdfnttal. Motion & Control o POPPET SPRING rh \ i 44 4 4 Check Valves c DRIVE SCREW BACK-UP RING Needle Valves WASHER ( Metering Valves e' Colorflow* Service Parts -r- 3*6 *9 BODY SIZE C 200 C 400 C 620 C 600 C 820 C 800 C 1020 C 1200 C 1220 C 1420 C 1600 C 1620 C 2000 C 2020 C 2400 C 2420 C 3200 C 3220 POPPET (SOFT SEAL) METAL BUNA VITON 013155-3 013320-N7 013320-V7 SPRINGS 5 PSl SSPSI 013151^- ''013215 001490-3 001839-N7 001839-V7 ,^001516 001585 004374-3 004917-N7 004917-V7 004394 004496 007300-3 007596-N7 007596-V7 007310 007379 010353-3 0103533 025299-3 025299-3 022195-3 0221953 026143-3 026143-3 030166-3 030166-3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 010371 010453 N/A 010371 010453 N/A 025314 N/A N/A 025314 N/A N/A 022192 N/A N/A 022192 N/A N/A 026139 N/A N/A 026139 N/A N/A 030158 N/A N/A 030158 N/A BODY SIZE N 200 N 400 N 620 N 600 N 620 N BOO N 1020 N 1200 N 1220 N 1420 N 1600 N 1620 N 2000 N 2020 O-RinG Buna viton 5101N-7 6101V-7 2006N-7 2006V-7 2008N-7 2006V-7 2010N-7 2010V-7 2011N-7 2011V-7 2012N-7 2012V-7 2112N-7 2112V-7 2112N-7 2112V-7 2113N-7 2113V-7 BABCinKG-UP NONE DRIVE SCREW 013300 LOCK SCREW 001832 107X6 001830 001832 107X8 004677 004691 107X10 007523 007524 107X11 010673 010678 107X12 010673 010678 107X112 025543 025544 107X112 025543 025544 107X113 025543 025544 BODY SIZE 2" 4" 620 6" 820 8" 1020 12" 1220 OCRING BUNA VITON 2010N-7 2010V-7 201 IN-7 2011V-7 BACK-UP RING 400004-1 400004-2 FOLLOWER 014012-2 002028-2 WASHER 014013-2 002023-2 HANDLE 014083-6 SELFLOCKING NUT 454001 002118-6 454001 2012N-7 2012V-7 400004-3 005017-2 005012-2 005065-6 457001 211 IN-7 2111V-7 400004-4 008013-2 008014-2 008079-6 459001 2112N-7 2112V-7 400004-5 011013-2 011014-2 011066-6 459001 a Fluidpower D0 A 134803 CONFIDFNT1AL -7 O Lf^) 6 &/0 1 Bulletin No. DC-D1VW-2-70 Design D1VW Series Solenoid Operated Directional Valves Service Bulletin Parker Fluidpower DO A 134804 CONFIDENTIAL Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 D1VW* B As Shown Reverse Solenoid and Associated Parts For D1VW* H D1VW* E As Shown Reverse Solenoid and Associated Parts For D1VW* K D1VW* F As Shown Reverse Solenoid and Associated Parts For D1VW* M Fluidpower DO A 13480.5 CONFIDENT! A' D1VW* C As Shown K O (2 0 N.m ) 18 m -ttw (3J)(TT) (Is) D1VW * D As Shown (20) (T) (b) DetailB With Leadwire Coils (20 0 N.m,) ISO in-tbs Torque 3aV (1.1 N.m.) lOin.-lbs. Sv Torque ---X ff Example Shown After Pnnting c With Conduit Box Coils Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 Fluidpower DO A 134806 CONFIDENTIAL DIVWSeri s Mod I Number System 1 SPOOLS ITM PART NO. DESCRIPTION | 11 697601 #1 Spool mm 21 31 41 5 6 71 8 9 10 1 11 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 20 21 1 697602 #2 Spool 697603 697604 697605 697606 697607 697608 *3 Spool #4 Spool 45 Spool #6 Spool 47 Spool 48 Spool 697609 697610 49 Spool #10 Spool 697611 411 Spool 697607 #7 Spool * 697603 697605 #3 Spool * 1 .5 spoor 697620 697662 - 697621 #20 Spool #21 Spool USISn [mm [HIHHl [mm [ " Rl| ;rxx n | H\lM\ [ [mIS 1 [4lhW! [ IS11 Sfrrijt:! I [ 22 1 697621 #22 Spool [ ! 30 30 Spool 697663 'Assembled m Reverse * Detent Version D 1 V W *-* [-* f iN iv SEAL COMPOUND Use Niime Seats Use Viton Seals <Y> Q Insen N tor Nitnie. V lor Viton * I n. VARIATIONS KEY / PART NO. DESCRIPTION EL1270 EL12070 EL12K70 EL12J70 EL12L70 EL12R70 5 EL12T70 ELI2270 ELH1DP ELH1JP ELH1KP ELH1TP ELH1YP 6 EP1370 EP1570 H 697714 697717 120 VAC Solenoid Style 120 VDC Solenoid Style 12 VDC Solenoid Style 24 VDC Solenoid Style 6 VDC Solenoid Style 24 VAC Solenoid Style 240 VAC Solenoid Style 250 VDC Solenoid Style 120 VDC Hirschmann 24 VDC Hirschmann 12 VDC Hirschmann 220/240 VAC Hirschmann 120 VAC Hirschmann 3 Pin Plug 5 Pin Plua AC High Pressure Tube DC High Pressure Tube 70 Design Code INTERNAL PARTS ITM PART NO. DESCRIPTION 2 Not Available Body 3 988-8x14x1 Centering Washer B 4 697625 697626 Centerina Sbrina Springs 2,7.8.9,14 spools 5 697627 Push Rod Q 6 99x37 7 697648 Roll Pin Gasket 8 697628 Shippina Plate 9 697981 Coil Retainer 697632 10 697633 AC Tube Y.T.Q.E DC Tube L.K.J.D.2 12 697647 Seal Coil C 13 697649 14 697675 End Cap Spool Stop 15 702809 Ball Clamp 16 98x5 F 17 697661 Ball Spool Stop 18 697660 Push Rod 20 2-012 0-9 O-Ring H 21 3-907 0-9 O-Rina 22 2-011 0-7 O-Rina 30 1300634 Conduit Box K 3' 697646 33 1301070 Seal Bottom Screw Ground 34 678800 Plug Conduit M 35 120x21 Sniooing Plug i 36 1300828 ! 37 130063$ 38 1301067 Seel Too Cover Conauil Bo Screw Conduit Box 40 697624 Plug 41 2-010O-7 O-Amg 46 1300637 Name Piaie 50 1300638 Name Plate 51 1301066 Slick Screws 52 EPHB Plug Black 'B' 53 EPHA Plug Grey 'A' T ITEM 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 CODE YC YF YP TC TP RC LF KC KCF KPF KSF JC ..... JCF JPF JSF DC DCF DPF ZC ZCF COILS PART NO. 697212 697250 697228 697213 697229 1300344 692622 697216 692623 693714 694791 697217 692624 693713 694793 697218 692625 694073 697219 693759 Note: See Page 4 for Solenoid Assemblies Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 3 Fluidpower DO A 134807 CONFIDENTIAL AC Part No. See COIL chart on pg.3 697632 697981 697648 697627 697647 Parts included tn Solenlod Ass mbly Description Quantity DC Part No. Coil Tube Assembly 1 ea. 1 ea. See COIL chert on pg.3 697633 Retainer 1 ea. 697981 Gasket Push Rod 1 ea. 1 ea. 697648 697627 Seal Coil 1 ea. 697647 Description Tube Assembly Retainer Gasket Push Rod Seal Coil Quantity 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. Miscellaneous Parts Nametag for Conduit Box 1300637 Nametag Hirschman / Mech. 1300638 Hirschmann Plugs (Female) Black - "B" Solenoid EPHB Grev - "A" Solenoid EPHA Hirschmann Plugs with Lights 12 Volts DC (KP) ELHIKP 24 Volts DC (JP) ELH1JP 110/120 VAC (YP) ELHIYP 120 VDC (DP) 220/240 Volts AC (TP) Conduit Box ELHIDP ELHITP 1300634 Seal Kit SKD1VW70 Code YC YCF YP TC TP EC ECF LC LCF KC KCF KPF KSF JC JCF JPF JSF DC DCF DPF ZC ZCF RC Solenoid Assemblies Part No. Description 697931 697935 697947 697932 697948 697934 697936 697937 697942 697938 697943 697957 697965 697939 697944 697958 697966 697940 697945 697959 697941 697946 1300346 110-120 50/60 Sol Assy 120/60: 110/50 Low Amp Assy 120/60. 110/50 Hirschmann Assy 240/60, 220/50 Sol Assy 240/60, 220/50 Hirschmann Assy 24/60 Sol. Assy Low Amp Sol. Assy. 6 VDC Low Amp Assv 6 VDC Low Amp Assv 12 VDC Sol. Assy 12 VDC Low Amp Assy 12 VDC Hirschmann Low Amp 12 VDC Spade Low Amp 24 VDC Sol. Assy. 24 VDC Low Amp Assy. 24 VDC Hirschmann Low Amp 24 VDC Spade Low Amp 120 VDC Sol. Assv. 120 VDC Low Amp Assy. 120 VDC Hirschmann 250 VDC Sol. Assv. 250 VDC Low Amp Assy. 24/60; 24/50 Sol. Assy. Solenoid Ratings Insulation Class F Wet Armature Type Allowable Deviation from rated voltage -10% +15% Solenoid Electrical Characteristics * Solenoid Code Nominal Volta/Hz In Ruah Amp* Holding Amps Watts y YF" T 120/60 110/50 120/60 110/50 240/60 220/50 2.00 2.10 0.9G 0.94 1.00 1.05 0.49 0.58 0.18 0.20 0.26 0.31 25 27 10 9.5 25 27 R 24/60 10.50 2.70 27 L LF' K KF' J JF* D DF* 2 ZF* 6 VDC 6 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VDC 120 VDC 250 VDC 250 VDC -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- 1 5.00 4.00 2.50 2.00 1.25 1.00 0.25 0 20 0 12 0 10 `Based on nominal voltage O 72F. "3000 PSI 40*- rated flow (low watt A.C.) 3000 PSl 85% rated flow Coil Leadwire. 18 awg 30 24 30 24 30 24 30 24 30 24 @ C.S A. file LR60407 Explosion Proof Solenoid Ratings U.L. (EU) Class 1. Div 1 & 2, Groups C & D. Class II. Div. 1 & 2. Groups E. F & G. As defined by the N.E.C. M.S.H.A. (EM) Complies with 30 CFR, Part 18 Solenoid Electrical Characteristics * EU and EM Solenoid Code Nominal Volts/Hz In Ruah Amps Holding Amps Watts Q 100/60 2.60 0.70 27 Y 120/60 220 0.58 27 T 240/60 1.10 0.29 27 R 24/60 11.10 2.90 27 L 6 VDC -- 5.50 33 K 12 VDC -- 2.75 33 J 24 VDC -- 1.38 33 D 120 VDC -- 0.2B 33 Z 250 VDC -- 0.13 33 Note: Consult factory for Explosion Proof Coil Assembly Part Numbers Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 4 Fluidpower DO Acc ssories Manaplugs -- El Ctrl al Plug-In ELECTRICAL PLUG-IN VALVE MODEL D1V (1/8') Hirschmann -- Female Connector BASIC CONFIGURATIONS Code 3 5 Description 3 pin plug 5 pin plug 70 DESIGN SERIES (Required when ordenng) ELECTRICAL PLUG HIRSCHMANN STYLE CONNECTOR COLOR Code A Bj Description Grey (Sotenori Al B*a tScasnod Bt Electrical Cords ELECTRICAL CORO NO. OF CONDUCTORS ELECTRICAL RCOumCMENTS "V ! Cede 1 1 Description ">w j 3 Conductor* (ltd S S Conductor* Cew 1 ; Description e %ei (ttd) 3 iee* 12 lest Indicator Lights Conduit Bo* Style Hirschmann Style ELI 2 ELECTRICAL LIGHTS ' VOLTAGE 70 DESIGN SERIES ELH1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTS P VOLTAGE * Cendwn Be* Style Code Y T R DvWRpBdA 120V AC SoOTOd *iy 240V AC Wxd Sty* 24V AC Sowxxl style D 120V DC Sownod eye L 6V DC Sownedthrie J 24V DC Saenod style K 12V DC So*enod style z 250V DC Soienod style * Conduit box style has 2 m. lights per M ** Hirschmann Style Cede Description KP 12V DC Hirschmann JP 24V DC Hirschmann VP 110/120V AC Hirschmann DP 120V DC Hirschmann TP 220/240V AC Hirschmann Hirschmann style has 1 ea. light per connector. Standard Bolt Kit Model Number BK209 1.25* long x 10-24 UNC-2A, SAE Grade 6, Note - Valves umo i coniunction with Torque to 50 in. tbs. (5.6 N.m.) Manapaks roqtwe longer bolts. 2/93, EG. 5M A WARNING FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS AtOO* SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH. PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. Thi* document and other information from Parker Hannifin Corporation, a* eubaiaenea and auBonnd ddtnbutora provide product anrVor system options for further investigation by veers having technical expertise II it anportant that you anatyza a aspects of your appacaaon ano iw** Via mtormation concerreng tha product or system m tha current product catalog. Duo to variety Of Operating conations and application* for that* products or systems rw um< wough m turn analysis and tasting. solely response** for making tha final aafaction of Via products and systems snd assuring that an performance, salary ano warning requirements of ma application are mel Tha products dascnbad harem, mctudmg without limitation, product faaluras. spaotications. designs. aviaapiftty and pricing, are suOtect to changa by Parkar Hannifin Corporation and Its subsidiaries at any time without notice Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 5 Fluidpower DO A 134809 CONFIDENTIAL - ^ -.General Installation Information Special installations Consult your Parker representative tor any application requiring the following; Pressure above maximums (see Specifications). Fluids other than those specified. Oil temperature above 71.1C (160F). Fluid Recommendations Premium quality hydraulic oil with a viscosity range between 150-250 SSU (32-54 cst) at 38C (100F) is recommended. The absolute operation viscosity range is from 80-1000 SSU (16-220 cst). Oil should have maximum anti-wear properties and rust and oxidation treatments Fluids And Seals Valves using synthetic fire-resistant fluids require special seals When phosphate ester or its Wends are used. VITON seals are required Water-giycw water-m-oii emulsions and petroleum oil may be used with NITRILE seals Filtration For maximum valve and sysiem component life, the system should be protected at a contamination level not to exceed 125 particles greater than 10 microns per milliliter of fluid (SAE Class 4 or better, ISO Cooe 1613) Tank Line Surges if several valves are piped with a common tank line flow surges in the line may cause unexpected spool shift Detent style valves are most susceptible to tnis Separate tank lines should be used when line surges are expected in an application. Silting Silting can cause any sliding spool valve to stick and not spring return, if held shifted under pressure tor long periods of time. The valve should be cycled periodically to prevent sticking. Single Pass Operation Valve flow ratings are for double pass operation (with equal flow in both paths). When using these components in single pass applications, flow capabilities may be reduced. Consult your local Parker representative for details. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valv Divisi n Elyria, Ohio 44035 -Jp -, Control Valv s-;. - Series D1V Flow Path Data D1V Operator A Locating Pin V: tP) CeffA) Operator B 'Note: On valves with 8 or 9 spool, A and/or B operators reverse sides. Flow paths remain the same as viewed from top of valve. Double Solenoid - With solenoid "A" energized, flow path is P-+A and B-T. When solenoid "B" is energized, flow path is P-B and A->T. The center condition on a spring-centered valve exists when both coils are de-energized, or during a complete shift, as the spool passes through center. Detent and Spring Offset - The center condition exists on detent and spnng offset valves only during spool crossover To shift and hold a detented spool, only a momentary energizing of the solenoid is necessary The minimum duration of the signal is approximately 0 1 seconds for both AC and DC voltages This position will be held provided the Spool center line sms honzontal plane, and no shock or vibration is present to displace the spool Single Solenoid - Spnng offset valves can be ordered in sn styles B E F. H K. and M Flow path data for me vanous styles are descnbed in the order cman Lever Operated (on B end) Pun lever away from vaive P--A B--T Push lever towam vaive P--B A--T Note Reverse with a *8 or #9 spool Electrical Failure Should eiecmc power tail, spring offset and spring centered valves will shift to the spnng held position Detented valves will stay in the last position held before power failure If mam flow does not fail or stop simultaneously, machine actuators may continue to function in an undesirable manner or sequence. Loss of Pilot Pressure (DIVA & D1 VP) Should a loss ot pilot pressure occur, spring offset and spring centered valves will shift to the spring held position. Detented valves will remain in the last position held. If main hydraulic flow does not simultaneously stop, machine actuators may continue to function in an undesirable manner or sequence, Torque Specifications Torque values recommended for the bolts which mount the valve to the manifold or subplate are as follows: #10-24 thread (M5-0.8) torque 5.6 N.m. (50 in-lbs.). Motion & Control DO A 13481O CONFIDENTIAL Poi-lt" Fax Note 7B7i To CoJDpt PtionC # w St~ ^. **\K* V. ,t" 11 -2- -------- Ph">.6 - 'TCC. .- v ij* F*' *'V. **t - s ->' coot ffT# Mr mm*t# prr Mtf AlAWIfR cesceiprroN ' D. 23 w- xum 2J_ 4 NA697666 05 _V & P7 +h/tf CCSB/IPrtOH WASHER SPRING 2C C697S20 20 PCb97fc30 *20 SPOOL #30 SPOOL A/ USE n:TIL SEALS REPLACE all o with 1ST USE vITCn SEA-S REPLACE all 0 WITH "V* 10 (H) 1 1? 13 14 i5 t l7 MC69763A M6697622 NA697&99 99 X 37 NC697626 3-9070-9 2-0120-9 2-038 0-9 t 1 2 1 2 A 7 COVER LABEl RIVET R3LL PIN SHIPPING =LA`E O-PI^CS. SEE BELOW -CP C0HP3LH0 axe irvt Mr orr oesswrit* a MA697723 7 ETC CAP - SAE 9 4NPS0O-S 7 SAC PLUG 1108 x 4 Cl 8 (A]1300189 2 ENC CAP - BSPP 9 vtTH I/4-M0 2 BSP PLUG -jj"_2 DESIGN SERIES rapper 00 A 134811 CONFIOFNTTAl o: t- r- 11.0 N \ (100 IN \ TORQUE -20.0 N-M (180 IN-LBS) TORQUE P.2/E DW?2- s AS SK*wW -p^pioH SKcWN I NOTES: 2) OPERATOR. MODEL NUMBER. ELECTRICAL INFORMATION. MAXIMUM PRESSURES. DATE CODE. . VALVE SCHEMATIC TO BE PRINTED ON LABEL (ITEM I I) AS SHOWN. WITH COLUMBIA GREAT LAKES RIBBON #79. (SEE MQ69727I FOR SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS.) (5) J 0 arrow point to a-port eno for all spools. DO A 134812 CONFIDENTIAL, Parts Identification Iloo /<fs" * ! Parker Series 2A,2H,3L,VH Cylinders -C vi 4 For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. D0 A 134813 CONFTDFNTTAL Parker Ser. 2A, 2H, 3L, VH Cylind rs Parts Identification Seal Kite Group 5 Service "symbol 14 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 62 119 120 121 DESCRIPTION Gland cartndaa Gland wiperseal Gland lipseal Piston lipsaal Gland back-up washer Pistpn back-up washer Gland to head o-nna End seal o-nna Piston ring Gland cartridae kit Outer nna Inner ring Wear ring SEAL KITS FOR CLASS 5 SERVICE Material: Fluorocarbon (Viton) For operating temperature and fluid compatibility see Section C, page 71. Gland & spanner wrenches are available to ease (rod) seal or gland cartridge removal without disassembly of the cylinder. For detailed seal replacement instructions see service bulletin #0995-Mi, M3 & M5. SERIES 2A. 2H, 3L A VH CYLINDERS RG RK ROD DIA. GLAND (SYM. A2) CARTRIDGE KITS CONTAINS SYMBOLS 14, 40. 41. 43 A 45 ROD SEAL KITS CONTAINS SYMBOLS 40. 41. 43 A 45 GLAND WRENCH 069590 0000 | SPANNER WRENCH '/I RG2AHL 0055 w RG2AHL 0065 1 RG2AHL OIOS 1H AG2AHL 005 AK2AHL 0055 AK2AHL 0065 RK2AHL 0105 RK2AML 0135 069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 1 011676 0000 011676 0000 011676 0000 011703 0000 1% RG2AML O'-S RK2AHL 0175 069593 0000 011677 0000 2 RG24HL 0204 Rk?ahl 0205 069594 0000 011677 0000 2* AG2**I. 3744 RK7AML 0255 069595 0000 1 011677 0000 3 RG2AML 0JC4 *2i"L 0305 069596 0000 011677 0000 3*1 RG2*"l 3344 4 RG7"i. 3*0* **4*rtL 3355 0*C4 069597 0000 069596 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 4*1 RG7AHL 0*44 053577 0000 011678 0000 s RG2*. :v 059599 0000 011678 0000 L-'** RG2A*L 044- 0455 069600 0000 011676 0000 *RG A RK MS SUM an w iwmm c 3 A ' Oort Ir*! 2h cylinders S* buiieiin 0995-M4 RING TYPE PISTON *1 Own AbOvel Supplied *1 t*'V3*'0 or 2H 3L A V" 'rt'wc cyfcnocft L1PSEAL TYPE PISTON Supplied as standard on sens 2A a eyimoers Lass symbol p*4 Optional tor series 2H. 3L & VH hydraulic cylinders. HI-LOAD TYPE PISTON rauiic cylinders. Not available on senes 2A A 3L Cylinders BORE SIZE {2 3' 4 5 ? 6 'C 14 k Rtioe UN mi SERIES 2A ONLY CONTAINS J LA SYMBOLS 42 A * Marts M K. 4 IK____ CONTAINS > EA oesoj *1 *4 A *7 * i *OC* Rv'SC.'Ajr* RaMC.'Av a- 7* -4.--..34 .T.--.. 34 PKSrc.'aTT* poc;* r P*t 50C; a x * R60C.'*X4 Pw 'OCe'A Tr A *.**>*, y> :* n:>..34 *4 ;4 P*90C2*3t* R**C,'X*. * 24 PA RISTON RING KITS SERIES 2H. 3L A VH CONTAINS 2 SYM 47 A 4 SYM 46 RO 102*0005 11S?m0005 RR202H000S PR252M0005 PR322H0005 PR*02*0005 RR502*0005 P60?H0005 PR702MOOOS P602m0005 PR902H0005 *R922h0005 - hi-loa 0 piston SEA L KITS SERIES 2H A VH CONTAINS 2 EA SYMBOLS 115.120 A 121 1-- 1 PK1S2HK005 1 RK202HK005 PK252HK006 PK322HK005 PK402HK0Q6 RK502HKQQ5 PK602HK005 PK702HK005 PK602HK005 PK902HK005 PK922HK005 BORE SIZE 1 ____ LUJ 2 2h 4 5 6 7 6 10 12 14 CB-CLiNOtR B00 Seal arts SEMES 2A IfRiCS 1". 3L A YH ... CONTAINS } (A CONTAINS 2 EA. iTMBOi SYMBOL 47 C6'C7*L304 CB*42"i.0C4 CB7C2". JC4 CB 102*1005 CB157HL005 C8202HL005 CB242-.304 C6252HLOOS CB322HL005 CP402HU005 CS&02HU0Q5 C8602Ht005 CB702HL005 C8602HL005 CB902HU005 C8922HL005 - TIE ROO TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (FT. LBS.) SERII S 2A STEEL BRASS SERIES SERIES CYL- BODY CYL. BODY 2 1_ 2 5 3 16 5 11 6 45 11 11 6 45 11 25 16 120 25 25 16 130 25 60 45 310 60 60 90 _4*5 525 790 --60 110 150 80 115 1160 2500 1_10 172 150 52B -- 275 230 -- - For use with High Water Content Fluids. Class 6 Service kit numbers listed above identify Class 5 seals only. To order with Class 6 seals (HWCF) substitute "6 " lor "5'' as Iasi digit of part number. How to order--individual seals contained in the kits are available separately--however we recommend purchasing complete kits because of convenience & lower replacement cost. When ordering seal kits give part number listed above To be sure o( exact replacement give serial number of cylinder when orderino reolacemenl kits or seals. Cylinder Division 500 So. Wolf Road Oa# Plainaa, It 60016 708/296-2400 Regional Plants Sania Fa Springs, CA 310/696-0985 Enhatd, CT 203/7*9-2215 Atlanta. GA 404/349-0563 a Goodland IN 219/297-3162 a Plymouth. Ml 313/455*1700 Hillsborough NC 919/732-6163 Hiflsoorough NC 919/732*9371 a Afcron. OH 216/253-4500 a Portland. OR 503/265-0664 a Ow*n Sound. Qnt, Can. 519/371-2662 a Toronto. Ont. Cm 416/255*4567 a lachtna. Ouabac, Can. 514/631-3995 Mofion&Control DO A 134814 CONFIDENTIAL TS-2000 Gland Seal Kits Parker Hydraulic Cylinders Gland Seal Kits For Hydraulic Cylinders (Gland Cartridges & Rod Seals, including TS-2000 Rod Seals) For Series H, 2H, 7" & 8" Bore 3H, VH, L, 2L & 3L Hydraulic Cylinders tymoa *0 *ymoo <odLCsa* symbol 4S gwno to Mad seal Installs In Rod End Head Groove *-7 ROD SEAL KFT *.* (tnu 1 SaC* V tn* lOMOWttg *c mo WMmii h-tx> 4 ' *oa ietaa> lrt> 4J 0-*vg pand 10 head tes1 Sendee tuts o< expendable parts for hydfut*c cylinders are stocked m principal industrial locations across the U S A and on*' countries For prompt delivery ana complete informa tion. contact your nearest Parker Manmtm OiStriDutor or ottce Standard Seals -- Class 1 Service Kit* are standard, and contain potyuretnane and Buna-N seals lor standard hydraulic service These seals are suitable for use when hydraulic (mmeral-type) oil is the operating medium. The recom mended operating temperature range (or Class 1 seats is 10*F {-23*C) to *165F (+74"C). The seals contained in these kits are supplied as standard on all Series 2H*. VH, 3L and 7" and 8* bore 3H cylinders manufactured after Sept. 30, 1990 for Class 1 hydraulic (mineral) oil service. The seals contained in these kits are interchangeable (or hydraulic (mineral) oil service on all Series H*, 2H' VH, L, 2L and 3L cylinders manufactured prior to Sept. 30,1990. Class 1 Hydraulic Oil Service Only AM Ota 'l V r iV i/ r 2V r 3V 4* 4V 5` 5V Gland Cartridge Kit* (Sym. *62) Class t (Std.) Buna-N (Nitrile) * Polyurethane BG2HLTS051 RG2HLTS061 RG2HLTS101 RG2HLTS131 RG2HLTS171 RG2HLTS201 RG2HLTS251 RG2HLTS301 RG2HLTS351 RG2HLTS401 RG2HLTS451 RG2HLTS501 RG2HLTS551 Rod Seal Kits Class t (Std.) Buna-N (Nitrile) A Polyurethane RK2HLTS051 RK2HLTS061 RK2HLTS101 RK2HLTS131 RK2HLTS171 RK2HLTS201 RK2HLTS251 RK2HLTS301 RK2HLTS351 RK2HLTS401 RK2HLTS451 RK2HLTSS01 RK2HLTSS51 The kits listed above do not lit 10* & 12' bore Series H & 2H Hydraulic Cylinders. See Bulletin V099S-M4. For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. D0 A 1.3A8TB confidential. Parker Hydraulic Cylind rs TS-2000 Gland S al Kits How To R plac Cylinder Gland Packing Fluid leakage around piston rod at the gland area will normally indicate a need to replace gland seals. First, remove cylinder from machine to which it is mounted or, it this is not feasible, disconnect the piston rod from rod clevis, knuckle or machine member to which it is fastened. The Parker Hannifin 'Jewel' gland is a unique cartridge design consisting of a bronze gland, pnmary lipseal and double lip wiperseaJ. II is threaded into the gland retainer plate, and all sizes are removable without disturb ing the lie rod torque. To remove the gland: a) Inspect the piston rod to make sure it is tree of burrs or other dis placed metal which would prevent sliding the gland off of the rod. b) For most cylinders, unscrew the gland (right hand thread) from the gland retainer plate. On 7* and 8* bore series 3H, all JJ mounting styles and 8* bore low pressure hydraulic cylinders remove the socket head cap screws secunng the round or square retainer plate The gland protrudes from the lace of the retainer and can be removed with wee grip pliers Or use a Parker Hannifin gland and spanner wrenen shown m the table below Installation Before installing a new gland, inspect the surface of the piston rod for scratches, burrs, dents or other damage. A damaged piston rod surface will result in premature rod seal failure. Lubricate the bore of the gland and the seals, and slide the gland over the end ol the piston rod. Thread the gland into the retainer until it is seated tirmly against the head. The gland-to-head O-nng, Sym. #45, serves as a torque prevailing lock. THE SEALS ARE PRESSURE ACTUATED. SO NO FURTHER ADJUST MENTS ARE NECESSARY. INSTALLS in ROD ENO HEAD GROOVE MAO (NO When reotaeng a giano on a rod when a treaded to the fun Oumeter or to tnaoed mat * couro damage me seats a skgnt rotary motion ol tne pane w4i new prevent oemage m eddiuon. because Mi-diameter mreads are usually supplied with me crest of me threads siigntiy truncated a meet o* arum stock or ome' mm. tough material can be wraooeo arotmo me threads to ne>p protect me gwnd seats when trtuy are being passed over me threads ci Swj* tne gland off o< me piston rod ano remove me seals Ttwougrey ewan me gtand and seai grooves msoect giano bore tor wear tt poro worn replace -- using gland cartridge IRC) kit complete w<m seats d) f gtand is not worn, replace seals omy using rod seal (RK) kit Lubricate gtand seal grooves ano an new seals insteli wiperseai Sym eao. m groove closest to eno of gtsna install koseat Sym sat, m seal groove Lips of seal anouid point toward the long beating side of the gland. e) An O-nng. Sym #45. is supplied with each gland cartridge tut tt serves as a seal between the gland and tne head This O-nng is a static seal and does not normally require replacement. The original O-nng may be left m place, unless it is known to Pe leaking (fluid flow around gland thread). Cylinder Bore Size r tv 2' 2V 3' * 4* 5' 6` r Retainer Bolt Torque For Cylinders with Round or Smell Square Gland Retainer Bolt Die. Torque 3/16* 15 In. Lbs. 1/4- 60 In. Lbs. 5/16- 10 Ft. Lbs. 3/0' 20 Fl. Lbs. 7/16" 35 Ft. Lbs. e- Gland Cartridge Wrenches Rod Dla. V V r iV IV 2' Gland Wrench (Symbol 63) 069590 0000 069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 069593 0000 069594 0000 Spanner Wrench (Symbol 63-A) Ot 1676 0000 011703 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 Tie Rod Nut Torque (Ft Lbs.) Cylinder Series L 2L - 3L 2 5 11 11 25 25 60 L-2L 244 3L*60 -- L-2L.513 3L * 110 M - 2H - VH - 3H -- 18 45 45 120 130 310 525 790 1160 Rod Dla. 2V 3' 3V 4' 5' 5V Gland Wrench (Symbol 63) 069595 0000 069596 0000 069597 0000 069596 0000 069599 0000 069600 0000 s manner Wrench Symbol 63-A) 011677 0000 011678 0000 Cylinder Division 500 So. Wall Road Dot Plaines. IL 00018 700/298-2400 Regional Plants Santa Fa Spring*, CA 310/098-0905 a EnHakt. CT 203/749 2215 Atlanta. GA 404/349-0583 a GooOtand, IN 219/297-3102 Plymouth. Ml 313/485-1700 Hlltjborough. NC (Aeeum) 919/732-0183 a HtUtaorouah. NC 919/732-9371 Akron. OH 210/253-4500 Portland. OR 503/205-0804 e Owen Sound, Ont. Can, 519/371-2002 a Toronto. Ont Can. 410/255-4507 a Lachme, QueOec, Can. 514/031-3995 S3 Motion & Control DO A 134816 CONFIDENTIAL INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL CONTAMINATION RESISTANT ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC SERVOVALVES The Parker BD series servovalves are ruggedly de signed specifically for use in the industrial market place. From its inception, over twelve years ago, the first stage amplifier (pilot valve) has established a solid history of trouble-free operation in very harsh environments. Minimum orifice diameters up to 20 times larger than other servovalves models substan tially increase reliability by reducing problems due to contamination. The second stage is a closed center, four-way spool and sleeve which features rectangu lar slots in the sleeve. The spool metering edges exactly match the flow slot edges in the sleeve to provide linear flow with respect to electrical input. The valves have rated flows up to 30 GPM. OPERATION The BO tones servovalves operate on a force feedback pmope between the second stage spool metering valve and Vie feral stage pilot valve torque motor. The pilot valve e a seigle )et pressue recovery unit that deects a conbnuvig stream of control fad mto a recerver The receiver has two ouOets that are poned to the ends of the valve mam spoof, PCi and PC7 The pressure m these pons is equal when rw feud |et centered n the receiver operang The feedback sprmg attached to the armature measures spod positron as a tome. The toroe and the torce of Vie torque motor armature provide the error dfipfacement o> Sw armature and its tkvener blade wmdow The wmdow edges (kven Vie iet stream to the proper receiver outlet to positron Vie spool to the eiectncalty commanded positron (INITIAL SPOOL MOVEMENT) PEjOT SUPPLY JCT- An electrical fcgnal applied to the pilot valve coil generates a magneto toroe on the armature/diverter blade assembly, pvotng Vw assembly and allowing fluid to flow into PCi. See Fgue 1 Ties positrons the main power spool to the lefl vie toroe from the feedback spring matches the magnate toroe At this feme the diverter blade is recentered ever Vw recewwQ orifices, and the spool motion stops at toe poeroon Flow, proportional to the input lectncal orvl vien metered out the C? port. Removal of the siecvcai Signal to the coil unbalances the forces, which re eroes Vw armature deflection and drives the spool to Vie xero current or nut! positron, as shown in Figure 2. Changmg the potanty of the current to the coil causes a magnate toroe m Vie opposite direction that results in flow from Vw C port '*. (NULL POSITION) F1GURE 1. SERVOVALVE OPERATION - COMMAND FOR FLOW FROM CONTROL PORT Cj Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 FIGURE 2. SERVOVALVE OPERATION - NULL POSITION, VALVE IN BALANCE .'A ` 2 JFluidpower DO A 113481 ft dentt al oonf i INSTALLATION INFORMATION EXTERNAL NULL ADJUST- OPERATING PRESSURE DECAL TO BE APPLIED ON NAME PLATE Surface to be Clean and dry 320 CONTROL PORT I 0 093 DIA PIN ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR MATES WITH MS 3106-14S-2S / @1 108 l@ JO ) RETURN PORT 0 09 NOM 012S MAX LOCATING PIN \ 0 093 INCH DIA --i PILOT- PRESSURE TEST PORT SAE STRAIGHT THD -4 TUBING CONTROL PORT 2 RESSURE PORT 0 328 DIA MOUNTING HOLES 4 PLCS TORQUE MOTOR COIL pnnn B ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR FLOW OUT ^ .APPLY CURRENT TO PIN B BD15 INSTALLATION DATA WEIGHT PORT DIAMETER MOUNTING SCREWS. SOC.HD.CAP, TORQUE 0-RING GROOVES 2.6 LBS. 0.375 IN. 5/16-18TH* 1.00 LONG 110IO150IN LB. 0.560 DIA. x 0.052 DEEP 0-RING SIZE ELECT. CONNECTOR MATES WITH MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE: ELECTRICAL INPUT (STD VALVE) COIL RESISTANCE (STD. VALVE) 2-013 MS3106-14S-2S 3000 PSI 60 MA (FULL FLOW) 60 * 6 OHMS NOTES: 1. SERVOVALVE MATING SURFACE TO BE FLAT WITHIN 0.002 INCH TIR. AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN 63 RMS. 2. SERVOVALVE MOUNTING SCREWS ARE TO BE TORQUED TO 110-150 IN.-LBS. ABOVE RUN DOWN TORQUE. 3. FOR PROPER ORIFICE SELECTION AND DECAL PART NUMBER. REFER TO TABLE 2. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 3 DO A 134819 CONFTDFNTTAl Ruidpower INSTALLATION INFORMATION i TORQUE MOTOR COIL i nnrcn AB ELECTRICAL connector pins for flow out Ci.apply + CURRENT TO PIN B BD30 INSTALLATION DATA WEIGHT PORT DIAMETER MOUNTING SCREWS. SOC.HD.CAP. TORQUE O-RING GROOVES 6.3 LBS. 0.500 IN. 5/16-18x3.25 LONG 110 to 150 IN. LB. 0.866 DIA.X 0.052 DEEP 0-RING SIZE ELECT. CONNECTOR MATESWITH MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE: ELECTRICAL INPUT (STD. VALVE) COIL RESISTANCE (STD. VALVE) 2-018 MS3106-14S-2S 3000 PSI 60 MA (FULL FLOW) 60 6 OHMS NOTES 1 SERVOVALVE MATING SURFACE TO BE FLAT WITHIN 0.002 INCH TIR, AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN 63 RMS. 2. SERVOVALVE MOUNTING SCREWS ARE TO BE TORQUED TO 110-150 IN.-LBS. ABOVE RUN DOWN TORQUE. 3. FOR PROPER ORIFICE SELECTION AND DECAL PART NUMBER. REFER TO TABLE 2. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 00 A 1348?0 oonf tdf initial FMdpcwer ^SERVOVALVE <2aUinstallation For maximum valve and system component life, the hydraulic system should be flushed and filtered to an absolute filtration of 25 p m before installing the servovalve. A flushing block should be used in place of the valve while cleaning the system. These blocks are available from Hydraulic Valve Division, as follows: BD15-PN 810099 BD30 - PN 820099 To keep contaminants from entering the servovalve and/ or hydraulic system, keep the valve shipping cover in place until immediately prior to installation. Never leave the port surfaces uncovered and exposed to contamination. A permanent non-bypass filter should be installed in the system to assure that the valve receives a clean supply of oil. The valve should be mounted as close as possible to the actuator or motor. It can be mounted in any plane, but it is best to have the spool as nearly horizontal as possible. The servovalve should be set up for the system operating pressure according to the instructions in the OPERATING PRESSURE portion of the SERVOVALVE MAINTENANCE section. After installing the servovalve, it must be determined if the valve and its electronics are phased properly. This can be accomplished by noting servovalve response to a change in input command. If there is no servovalve response, the two electrical leads to the valve must be interchanged to correct an out-of-phase condition. NULL ADJUSTMENT If it is desired to have the actuator go to a preferred position with electrical power off (electrical failure), a null offset adjustment can be made to make sure the actuator moves to the desired position. To adjust the valve null, the following procedure should be used: 1. Remove the screw from the null adjust access hole in the valve cover, (see installation drawing for its location). 2. Make sure the actuator or motor is unobstructed in case it were to move its load fully in either direction. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector on the valve. 4. Apply the rated supply pressure to the valve. 5. Insert a nonmagnetic 1/16 inch hex wrench into the access hole and engage the adjusting screw. (A magnetic wrench can be used but must be moved out of the hole after each adjustment to determine if the desired position has been achieved). The screw can be rotated in either direction until the desired result is obtained. (Actuator motion stops, retracts, etc.). The adjustment available is 10 to 15% of full valve stroke through approximately +4 turns of the screw. The screw is trapped on either end so it cannot come out; however, it should not be overtightened at the ends of its travel. The adjusting screw locking device offers resistance to turning or moving on its own. 6. After adjustment, replace the access hole sealing screw. DITHER If the system resolution is not as precise as desired, it can sometimes be improved through the use of "dither". A small amplitude signal at a relatively high (60-150 Hz) frequency is superimposed on the valve command signal. This signal will cycle the valve spool at this higher frequency sufficiently to prevent valve "silting" and "stiction". It should be noted however, that if the amplitude is high enough, or the frequency low enough, the acutator could respond to the signal in such a way that would wear the seals rapidly. Therefore, care should be exercized in setting the frequency and amplitude of the dither If dither does not solve the problem, the feedback device may be the limiting factor, or the servovalve may be sized too large for the accuracy desired SERVOVALVE OaU MAINTENANCE GENERAL This section provides maintenance instructions for the BD Series servovalves. Except for orifice changing and filter removal, cleaning and reinstallation. field disassembly of the servovalves should never be attempted. FILTER MAINTENANCE If the valve performance appears sluggish or exhibits slow overshooting, the valve filter would be the first thing to check. It can be serviced as follows: 1. Wipe the surface around valve mounting flange as clean as possible, then loosen the four bolts securing valve to mounting pad. 2. Remove the valve, taking care not to set uncovered port flange of servovalve on a contaminated surface. 3. Inspect the port flange carefully, and if necessary, remove contamination using a clean wiper. Make certain that contamination is prevented from entering open fluid ports. 4. Using the special wrench 820000TF3-1 remove filter cartridge. See Figure 3. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Divisi n 5 DO A 1,34821 CONFIDENTIAL FUdpower o SUPPLY PRESSURE PORT FIGURE 3 FILTER CARTRIDGE REMOVAL 5 Clean filler by soaking in tricloroethylene or other suitable solvent for 5 minutes, and blow dry from the inside out using filtered dry compressed air. 6 Be sure cartridge is dry and free from solvent before reinstalling 7. inspect filter for cleanliness and damage to screen. 8 Position filter in servovalve cavity using the 620000TF3-1. wrench. 9 Tighten filter to 15 30 in. lbs above run down torque. 10. Install servovalve on mounting pad. Refer to pages 3 or 4 as required for installation. PILOT OPERATING PRESSURE The servovalve pilot stage operates on a relatively con stant supply pressure. The pilot supply pressure should be approximately 450 psi. This pressure is established by placing an orifice between the servovalve supply pressure and the pilot valve. The orifice, part number 8100006. is located under the filter shown in Figure 3. Table 2 shows the color coding, the dash number and the servovalve supply pressure range recommended for each particular orifice. It is important that the proper orifice be selected for the system pressure being applied to the servo. Improper orifice selection may over pressurize the pilot or result in very sluggish performance. To check or change the orifice, remove the filter as described in maintenance section. The top of the orifice should be visible when the filter is removed. It can be removed with a small blade screwdriver. The valve is set up to operate within a pressure range that can be verified by the dash number on the orifice. Should it be decided to change this pressure range, a suitable new orifice must be selected and then install d as follows: 1. Lightly lubricate the new O-ring. with hydraulic fluid. 2. Install orifice in pressure port and snug down with a straight-slot screwdriver. Care should be taken to select a screwdriver whose blade is not so wide that it will damage the threads in the housing. 3. Install filter as described in the FILTER MAINTENANCE section. USE OF TEST PORT The -4 Test port is provided should a verification of pilot valve supply pressure be desired. To use this port, the -4 plug must be removed, and replaced with a -4 tube fitting and suitable pressure gage. When system supply pressure is applied to the servovalve, the pressure indicated on the pressure gage is pilot valve supply pressure. This pressure should be 350 to 600 psi with the valve at null The test port may be also be used as an alternate pilot supply port by installing a blank supply orifice, -00 (red) in the valve body The pilot supply pressure should be set between 450 psi and 500 psi. Special care must be taken to assure that this source is provided with a 25 filter in it. it should be noted that the tank line from the pilot is joined inside the valve with the 2nd stage tank line. ELECTRICAL CHECKOUT These instructions are for a standard valve. Valves with other coils should be checked to +10% of the rated resistance of the valve. 1 Using a standard ohmmeter. check the servovalve lead resistance. 2. Check the coil resistance as follows: a. Attach ohmmeter leads to pin A and pin B. Coil resistance should read between 54 ohms and 66 ohms. b. There shall be no continuity between either pin and servovalve case. c. If coil resistance is greater than 66 ohms or less than 54 ohms, return the servovalve to the factory. BACK PRESSURE During normal hydraulic system operation, back pressure in the return system (tank line) is approximately 25 psi. Excessive back pressures due to clogged filters, system contamination, system out of trim etc., impose undesired forces on system components, and add significantly to the work required to move a load. Energy is being wasted and system components are being overworked. Back pressures in excess of 200 psi should be investigated immediately and the discrepancies corrected. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Cl.m-5 Ofiln AArn* 6 DO A 1.3482? CONFTDFNTTAL Ruidoower FIELD SERVICE SUGGESTIONS Initial Check ut Procedure . 1. Remove the electrical cable from the valve and con nect pins A & B to a hand held power source (a 1 1/2 to 9 volt battery with a potentiometer to vary the input will do.). 2. Operate the valve with the hand held power source. If the indicated problem cannot be duplicated, the mal function is more than likely in the wiring, controller or hydraulic system. 3. If the valve does exhibit the problem, refer to Table 1 for service suggestions. Symptoms Servovalve does not follow input command. (Actuator or motor is Stopped.) Sluggish valve (Servovalve output lags electrical commano signal or it fails to meet its ratea output) High null Dias (high input current required to maintain actuator or motor stationary.) Output flow obtained from one pon (Actuator hard over no response to servo command.) Very high flow to cyl. port with little or no current input. Oscillation or hunting motion of acutator in the closed loop system. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 TABLE 1. SERVICE SUGGESTIONS Possible Causes 1) Open coil wire o' open coil lead to connector pm 2) Totally piuggea Supply onfice or filter 3) Spool slue* 1) Partially plugged a Fine' b Oritice c Pnoi Va*ve 2) Leaky s**** *C *mg 3) Low puoi k-eo> presses* 4) CytinOe* pmr rng failure 5) Shooed ccw 6) Low SupOt press*** 11 incorrect aotust 2) Pant*!** pegged recover 1b Verify or Correct 1) Check lead and coil resistance. If tnere is an "open", remove the connector and check it's solder pints Resolder if required 2) Remove and inspect filter and orifice per Maintenance Section. 3) Return to factory 1) a Remove and inspect filter per Maintenance Section b Remove and inspect orifice per Maintenance Section C Return to factory 2) investigate excessive internal leakage to tank (bypassing (low sound) 3) Check pilot supply pressure per Maintenance Section 4) Check cylinder (listen for bypassing sound) 5) Check coil resistance in accord ance with Maintenance Section. Electrical Checkout 6) Verify that the supply pressure to the valve falls within the range noied on the valve nameplate 1) Adjust null per Servovalve Maintenance Section. 2) Return valve to factory. 1) Viv enproperty phased 2) Plugged t**oi valve receive* pod 3) Spoor stuck 1) Pilot valve malfunction. 1) Swap the two leads to the valve coil to change the polarity of the current to the coil. 2) Return valve to factory. 3) Return valve to factory. 1) Return to factory. 1) Valve drive electronics gam set too high or some other misadiustment. 2) Paritally plugged orifice or filter 3) Sticky spool. 1) Reset electronics. See electronics installation manual 1460 IM. 2) Check pilot pressure at test port and/or remove, inspect, and clean orifice/filter per Servovalve Maintenance Section. 3) Return valve to factory. 7 DO A 1,34833 OONFTDFNTT Al. Ruidpower TABLE 2. ORIFICE SELECTION AND RDERING INFORMATION KIT NUMBER* 810014-00" 810014-16 810014-18 810014-20 810014-22 810014-33 810014-50 PRESSURE RANGE (PSD EXT. PILOT 0 TO 3000 2600 - 3000 2000 - 2550 1400 - 1950 1000 - 1350 700 - 950 200 - 650 COLOR CODE RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW ORANGE BLACK WHITE Kits include the orifice, an 0-nng (PN 5-103) and the orooer decal to be applied to the valve name plate Viton O-ring kits are also available, order Parte* Niknbe* 6iOOl3-XX "This Part Number is a blank with no hole it is used when an enema* pilot fluid source is supplied to the test port FOR APPLICATION ASSISTANCE, CONTACT OUR NEAREST REGIONAL SALES OFFICE CAUFORMA WVWE.CA (714) 660-7033 OHK) CLEVELAND. OH (216) 531*3000 GEORGIA MARIETTA. GA (404) 656-6964 OMO CINCMNATIOH (513) 7*32011 ALMOtS DES PLAVCS. L (708) 296-2400 WOMAN TROY. Ml (313) 589-2400 TEXAS RICHARDSON. TX (214)2364020 CANADA TORONTO. ONT. (416) 255-7371 NEW ENGLAND SMITHTOWN, NY (516)231-3737 . . A WARNING FALLRE OR B#>ROPER SELECTION OR MPROPER USE OF TIC PR00UCTS ANDIOR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED HEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH. PERSONAL tilURYAH? PROFBOT'DAMAGE. - ~ Thwttoqansrt and Kfieii 4m niaaon tromPwkar Hannt>nCo*pwga.MMbskijna and authorized ttsfributors provide product andfor system tar hetier ktvesfigabon by users hevstg aetnori custom t Is important that you analyze af aspects of yota appficalion tactodng awieantw d any falure, wxl review t rSormabon ocncenetg *w portocs or system In the cunnt product catalog. Dua to ttie variety of oparalstgconcBiogs end applications tar theeeproduasor yasw.>w user, trough Its own analyse and tattoo. is sgtatyrsapoostote tormakers tia final selection of the product and tytoems and aasutog tha a> performance, eaiety and warning reqiwemecrtot the appBcabon sre met The prertacb describedharem, rearing irittiout imitation. produatamtfsa.spedfiLaiiura, designs, avaiafatBy id pridng.ero subjectto change by Parker Harrvfin Corporation rod its atosriaries at wry time wttwut noses. '- Offer of Sale : The items deeartoedinlhisdocument we hereby ottered tor sale by Pettier Hwrifin Corporation, as subafifiaiesoritaautiorizeddstrbiiMrs.This, oflarwto its aocapancearo governed by theprevisions statedin'OAarot Sato*, pubfishedtotie Prioe List PL2S0. Please contact tie Hyriaufic. VNve Division lor more kdomiatiun. - -- fss am zsu Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 520 Temes Avenue Elyria, Ohio 44035 ni--------- i'n c\ ice conn do a 134824 CONFIDENTIAL RuidDOwer PILOT-TO-CLOSE SWITCHING ELEMENT (toot WITH DIFFERENTIAL AREA POPPET Refer to page 9.02 for furth r technical information. Bi-directional operation with sealed pilot for zero leakage. 5000 psi maximum operating pressure. 25 GPM Nominal <es 1 Cartridge T--11A Cavity Inst ition Torque 30 to 35 lb. ft. 0 to 50 GPM Nominal Series 2 Cartridge T-2A Cavity Installation Torque 45 to 50 lb. ft. .98 in, N Across Comers (.88 in. Hex) Port <3) Port / Port 1 Maximum Extension from Locating Shoulder. Locating Shoulder 1.30 in. Across Comers (1.12 in. Hex) Pori (Z &r~l Port S3 Port 1 Maximum Extension from Locating Shoulder. PoryQ pilot displacement .04 in3 Area at Port 3 is 1.8 times the area at Port 1. Leahage rate less than 5 drops/mm. Port 3 pilot displacement * .07 in3 Area at Port 3 is i .8 times the area at Port i. leakage rate less than 5 drops/mm 200 150 a. II 100 a 50 zFull Open Pressure Drop 3 10 1} 20 25 0 = GPM MODEL PRICE LODC-XDN $ 27.40 Full Open Pressure Drop 300 ' 1 , 1 :x J -i ' 200 ' ' V: 100 1 ^1 1 . i --f ! 0 10 20 30 40 SO Q = GPM MODEL PRICE LOFC-XDN $ 37.50 OPTIONS CONTROLS y Non-ad|ustable -JTT --LO* C - XD* - * *C*/Z*.Baste carmoge from abov* I CRACKING PRESSURE I SEALS D ^T.95PopSsSUreat $ .00 +$ *00 NBuna-N V Viton I BODY + $ .00 +$1.50 Omit tor Cartridge Only or See Body Locator Page 9.06 o no DO A 134825 CONFIDENTIAL TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS an orifice, regardless of variations in upstream or downstream pressure. The orifice may be fixed or variable, including the variable orifice created by proportional type directional valves. Modulating cartridges can serve as main stage pressure controls to handle high flows with a low flow pilot circuit to control the performance of the cartridge. This allows a great deal of flexibility in creating a variety of operating conditions during a machine cycle. Functions such as multiple control pressures and venting or deventing can be incorporated at appropriate points in the cycle, using small solenoid operated valves. Switching Cartridges SUN offers two basic logic switching cartridges: pilot-- to-open (LK'C) and pilot-to-close (LO*C). PiiOHcwDpen ;1 Pilol-to-dose Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas AI or A2. tends to open the valve. The bias spririg force, together with pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to close the valve. Depending on the direction of flow, pilot-to-close switching valves open when the forces; affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater thin the force affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will open to either direction of flow when pressure at port 1 or port 2 is high enough to overcome the bias spring force. For example: Pressure required to open at port 1 * 50 psi Pressure required to open at port 2 * 65 psi When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure . acting on A3 (plus the bias spnng torce), tends to hold the valve dosed The valve may then be opened by venting the pilot pon (3) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2 From the area ratios listed above n can t>e seen that I ^ 1 8 i or tOOO psi at port 3 will h^ld the valve closed against pressures up to 1800 psi at port i with port 2 referenced to tank. Switching cartridges are unbalanced poppet, two-way valves with a third (pilot) port to control poppet operation The unbalanced poppet can be operated: ~ 2 25 i or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. A) directly by pressure at either work port B) by pilot pressure from an external source Operation of LK*C NOTE: 8ecause of their unbalanced poppet design, me operation of SUN's switching cartndges is pressure dependent The opening and closing movements of the poppet are functions o* the force balances on three areas - port 1, port 2, and port 3 NOTE: Because logic switching cartridges are pressure responsive at all three ports, it is essential to consider an aspects of the system operation through a complete cycle when designing logic circuits. If pressure changes on any port are of sufficient magnitude, they may cause a valve element to switch from a closed to open condition, or vice versa. All possible pressure changes in the complete circuit cycle must be considered to assure a safe functional system design. Operation of LO*C Area Ratios Pon I Art* IAi) 100% Pon 2 Art* (A2l 80% Pon 3 Art* (A3i 180% Area Ratios XT -181 55 *Z-25i f . AI . 100 |1t ] || -rfo<>n -V ! A3.100 !> A2-60 Area Ratios Pon i Area (Ai) . 100% Pon 2 Area (A2) - 80% Port 3 Area (A3) 180% Area Ratios A3 A1 1.8:1 A3 A2 2.25.1 Pilot-to-Close Switching Cartridge LO*C Pilot-to-Open Switching Cartridge LK*C Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas Ai or A2, plus the bias spring force, tends to close the valve or add to the closing force. Pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to open the valve. Pilot-to-open switching cartridges close when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the forces affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will close and remain closed regardless of the pressure at port 1 or port 2. o n-1 DO A 1.34836-----------------------CONFTDFNTTAI. TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure, acting on A3 (minus the bias spring force), tends to open the valve. The valve may be closed by venting port 3 (pilot) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios listed above, it can be seen that: A3 ^ = 1.8:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. jA23 * 2.25:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Switching Elements as Directional Controls Four logic switching cartridges are required to duplicate the functions of a spool type four-way directional valve; one cartridge for each port - P, T, A, and B. By controlling the opening and closing of each element, twelve different flow paths can be obtained. Using logic switching cartnoges. n is possible to shift from one flow condition to any other without going through any intermediate (or "center") valve condition or function. Because the opening of the cartridges can be precisely controlled, the logic circuit can anticipate the requirements of the system, allowing flow to shift direction smoothly. By contrast, most spool type directional valves have only three operating positions and must always pass through a center condition when changing from one flow path to another. The opening order and shifting conditions are rigidly fixed by the spool configuration and overlap. Typical logic element four-way directional valve circuits, illustrating pilot-to-close and pilot-to-open cartridges are described below. NOTE Both normally open and normally closed switching cartndges are seated poppet type valve designs, so leakage between port 1 and port 2 is essentially zero. All SUN switching cartridges are manuiaaured with seats on the pilot piston, eliminating any leakage between the pilot and work pons. Therefore, either work port can be selected as a source for self-piloting witnout fear of loss of pressure from the pilot section of the wom pon Port 3 must be tree of an and full of oil before starting up new systems PILOT TO CLOSE SWITCHING ELEMENTS Typical Circuit Equivalent Spool Valve Symbol AB 1 PT n1 1 Logic Element abed 0 000 0 XXXX ED X 0 X 0 m 0X0X to X 0 X X Vt X X 0 X tY 0 X X X II X X X 0 j T X 00X L T OX X 0 1 ~l 0 OjX X r X X|0 0 o - vented x - piloted PtLOT TO OPEN SWITCHING ELEMENTS Typical Circuit Equivalent Spool Valve Symbol A___ B Logic Element ------ 2 2 ------- _ --O O * 1 O O--i 2 I A I ,, - 4J * K, - |~ A' . tJC A' * 100 P----- T Ei I A'-IOC TTj ill 3 E a a* b c d XX X X oi oio o OlXiOX X 0X0 0X00 00X0 \ I ""I !? r~ hj r|j r--ri M;] Tw A-| ic) Iw <> [ j-B ^ Pfl X 0 0 0 ii 0 0 0 X JU 0 X X 0 0 X 00X X X 00 0 00XX o - vented x - piloted 9.04 DO A 134827 OONFIDFNTTAL Apollo* Data PRESSURE DROP O a. O cc Q W (C D t/3 13 as. PRESSURE/TEMP RATINGS* REINFORCED IFE SEATED VALVES STANDARD VALVE RATINGS Bronze Valves 600 P.S.I. WOG, Cold, Non-Shock 316 Stainless Steel and Carbon Steel Valves 2000 P.S.I. WOG, '/" through 1" -1500 P.S.I. WOG, 1 'A" through 2" 1000 P.S.I. WOG. 2'/j" & 3" Cold Non-Shock All standard valves rated lor 150 P.S.I. saturated steam on-off service Vacuum service to 29 inches mercury All valves tested to MSS-SP-72, 100 P.S.I. air under water, in the opened and closed positions 5 s s s s s 8 ? s s a * a b a s s 3 3 a ft a ^ a a $ 2 a a 3 a tm tr THE %ApM, NUMBERING SYSTEM PLEASE USE ALL SEVEN DIGITS WHEN ORDERING (Catalog number plus design number) AVAILABILITY ON REQUEST 00-0 0 0 00 JTL T. *1 ' I '\ MATERIAL OR STYLE BRONZE BRONZE WITH PADS CARBON STEEL. HI-PRESSURE CARBON STEEL NICKEL PAD-LOCKING BRONZE 316 STAINLESS STEEL BRONZE FULL PORT SPECIAL VALVES REFRIGERANT VALVES . CHLORINE. CARBON STEEL BRONZE FULL PORT HYDRO CS.. REG. PORT. 3000 PS1 CS.. FULL PORT, 3000 PSI SS.. REG. PORT. 3000 PSI TYPE 1. NPT FEMALE/150 FLANGE 2. SOLDER & SOC. WELD/150 FLANGE-FULL PORT 3. UNION END-NPD5TD. PORT 3 PIECE NPT 4. UNION END, SOLDER/STD. PORT SOC WELD 5. "DEADMAN"/HIGH PRESSURE. FULL PORT NPT 6. 3-WAY, NFT/HIGH PRESSURE, SOC. WELD FULL PORT 7. BUTT WELD/300 FLANGE 8. MALE X FEMALE NFT/600 FLANGE 9. 3-WAY. SOLDEHO-RING BOSS VARIATIONS 1. ONE SIZE LARGER MALE RETAINER 2. ADJUSTABLE STOP LEVER 3. MONEL BALL & STEM 4. SS. BALL & STEM 5. ORIGINAL BALANCING STOP- ATTACH TO LEVER OR T-HANDLE 6. RACE. TRIM. 73 STYLE 7. ONE SIZE SMALLER FEMALE RETAINER 8. NOT ASSIGNED 9. PINNED RETAINERS SIZE* 1. %" 2. V' 3. 'h" 4. %" 5. 1" 6. 1*4" 7.\'h" 8. 2" 9.2'h" 0. 3" A. 4" C. 6" E. 8" G. 10" H. 12" . S.S.. FULL PORT. 3000 PSI BRONZE. UL LISTED BRONZE. UL LISTED. PLAIN BALL BRONZE 3 PIECE FULL PORT CARBON STEEL-3 PIECE FULL PORT 316 S.S 3 PIECE STD PORT 316 S.S 3 PIECE FULL PORT 316 S.S-FLANGED CARBON STEEL-FLANGED OPT Sd WMZJ> eyes AM MRED NOTE ? A.: VAA-.ATIOMS an; fATUFES available ot. same .a;ve conSv conbbaco representative CAST CARBON STEEL WTADS BRONZE HVY. PATT.. UNIBODY BRONZE. UL LISTED BRONZE. UNIBODY CAST STEEL. UNIBODY STEEL. UNIBODY BRONZE STOP & DRAIN 316 S.S. UNIBODY 01 STANDARD 02 GROUNDED 03 VU" EXT. STEM 04 2'f," EXT. STEM os PLUN BALL 06 SPECIAL 2000 LB. (73 SERIES IV. 2") 07 TEE HANDLE OS 90* REVERSED STEM 1C S.S LEVER 4 NUT 12 STAMP 157 SWP a BAGGED 13 STAMP 157 SWP 14 VENTED BALL IS ROUND HANDLE 16 VERT. CHAIN LEVER (EXCEPT 73 & 931 17 ROUGH CHROME 19 WITH LOCK PLATE (73.93 4 76) 21 UHMWPE SEATS. 3-PDCE/R.P. RANGE 23 TANK VALVE. 3 PIECE ONLY 24 GRAPHTTE STEM PACKING DESIGN 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 37 41 45 49 57 59 60 62 63 64 DRY CHLORINE TRIM C7A-130 SERIES) LATCH LOCK LEVER MOUNTING PADS NOT THREADED (76-100 SERIES) 1500 LB 3-PC RRESAFE DESIGN CAM-LOCK HANDLE SIDE OUTLET NOT TAPPED (7B SERIES) S-S TEE HANDLE AND NUT 76-300/400 THUD. FOR ACTUATOR MTG. VIRGIN TFE TRIM ACTUATED AUTO DRAIN. BRONZE VALVES LESS LEVER 4 NUT ASSEMBLED DRY OXYGEN CLEANED--BRONZE 4 S.S. ONLY S.S. EXTERNAL TRIM (82 4 B3 SERIES) GROUNDED BALL 4 STEM 3 PIECE CENTER SECTION NPT X SOLDER/SOCKET WELD 250 LB. STEAM ____ 2 DO A 1348?q CONFTDFNTrAl HooiS^ #10 Ne die Valv s Series NV101 Needle Valve Application The NV101 Series Needle Valves provide speed control and shutoff where a reverse flow check is not required. Operation The valve acts as a fixed orifice in a hydraulic circuit. The effective size of the orifice increases as the tapered needle is opened. Shutoff is provided when fully closed. Flow can be metered with this cartridge in either direction. Features n~ i (D f--A<-| (2) Metered Flow--Either Direction Ha'oened operating parts for long life Compact canrioge design r,<v m*eac on needles ior p'eose adiustment Installation Data Set- !*h- installation Information secton qi this ca'a og to* specific recommendations pertaining to ttste-" ceammess fluids sea's ana ome' <'npo"an, tarto's relative to me p'ope' installation anc use o' inese products Performance Curve Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop (Needle Full Open) iTnrough cartridge only. For performance of bodies see section MV), af 66 ( 55 PSI 100 ~T ~1 T 1-- Hydraulic Oil 60 - 100SSU.SG 0 06 i 4 1 60 2.8 40 1.4 20 00 6 e 10 12 14 Cartridge Valve Specifications 1 * v ' a r .Mk Ra1 ng M.n a` '" P-essj'e Mji S'-.iD'ifwjea: Ra't-3 6 Row Melt Vtj f ht*C! tf- O 'tce 16 GPM (60 l/M) 3500 PSI (245 Bar) 5 drops'min. (1/3 cc/mm.) .062 m2 ng Te-'O A-na-e-'i -40=F to + 200F (Nitrile) -25F to + 250F (Viton) Can*oge Matena' Boat Matenai Filtration Mounting AH pans steel. All operating pans hardened steel Steel ISO Code 16/13, SAE Class 4 or better No Restrictions Cavity Common Cavity No. Cl0-2 (See Cavity Details section) Construction Metered Row o > 16 GPM Metered Row (1) 0 7.6 15 23 30 38 45 53 FLOW (In------ Out, Full Open) 61 UM For additional information - call your local 50 Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. D0 A 134830 CONFTDFNTTAL Inches Dimensions (Millimeters) Cartridge Only N edle Valves Series NV101 Cartridge in Body Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 DO A !34801 CONF t DpMTlAL Motion & Control PILOT-TO-OPEN SWITCHING ELEMENT [lOOlS^ WITH DIFFERENTIAL AREA POPPET Refer to page 9.02 for further technical information. Bi-directional operation with sealed pilot for zero leakage. With no pilot signals, flow is blocked in both directions. 0 to 60 GPM Nominal Series 3 Cartridge T-17A Cavity Installation Torque 150 to 160 lb. ft. 0 to 120 GPM Nominal Series 4 Cartridge T-19A Cavity Installation Torque 350 to 375 lb. ft. 1.56 in. Maximum Diameter (125 in Hex) Port 2 Pori 1 Maximum Extension from Locating Shoulder. 2.06 in. Maximum Diameter (1.62 m. Hex) Locating Shoulder --3 Port 2 Port t Pod 3 o>*ot displacement . 15 in 3 Port 3 pilot displacement . 30 m 3 9.11 DO A 13483? OONFTDFNTIAI TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS an orifice, regardless of variations in upstream or downstream pressure. The orifice may be fixed or variable, including the variable orifice created by proportional type directional valves. Modulating cartridges can serve as main stage pressure controls to handle high flows with a low flow pilot circuit to control the performance of the cartridge. This allows a great deal of flexibility in creating a variety of operating conditions during a machine cycle. Functions such as multiple control pressures and venting or deventing can be incorporated at appropriate points in the cycle, using small solenoid operated valves. Switching Cartridges SUN offers two basic logic switching cartridges: pilot-- to-open (LK*C) and pilot-to-close (LO*C). Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas A1 or A2. tends to open the valve. The bias spring force, together with pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to close the valve. Depending on the direction of flow, pilot-to-close switching valves open when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the force affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will open to either direction of flow when pressure at port 1 or port 2 is high enough to overcome the bias spring force. For example: Pressure required to open at port 1 = 50 p$i Pressure required to open at port 2*65 psi When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure , acting on A3 (plus the bias spring force), tends to hold the valve closed. The valve may then be opened by venting the pilot port (3) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios listed above, it can be seen that: 1.8:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. Switching cartridges are unbalanced poppet, two-way valves with a third (pilot) port to control poppet operation. The unbalanced poppet can be operated: A) directly by pressure at either work port B) by pilot pressure from an external source NOTE: Because of their unbalanced poppet design, the operation of SUN's switching cartndges is pressure dependent. The opening and closing movements of the poppet are functions of the force balances on three areas - port 1. port 2, and port 3. NOTE: Because logic switching cartridges are pressure responsive at all three ports, it is essential to consider all aspects of the system operation through a.complete cycle when designing logic circuits. If pressure changes on any port are of sufficient magnitude, they may cause a valve element to switch from a closed to open condition, or vice versa. All possible pressure changes in the complete circuit cycle must be considered to assure a safe functional system design. ~ * 2.25:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Operation of LK*C Area Ratios Port i Area (Ai) - 100% Port 2 Area (A2) 80% Port 3 Area (A3) - 180% Area Ratios ^ .1.8:1 %. -2-251 Operation of LO*C Area Ratios Port 1 Area (A1) 100% Port 2 Area (A2) - 80% Port 3 Area (A3) * 180% Area Ratios fi -2-25;1 Pilot-to-Close Switching Cartridge UO*C Pil0t-to-Open Switching Cartridge LK*C Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas AI or A2, plus the bias spring force, tends to close the valve or add to the closing force. Pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to open the valve. Pilot-to-open switching cartridges close when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the forces affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will close and remain closed regardless of the pressure at port 1 or port 2. om DO A 134833 OONFTDFNTIAl technical tips LOGIC ELEMENTS When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure, acting on A3 (minus the bias spring force), tends to open the valve. The valve may be closed by venting port 3 (pilot) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios listed above, it can be seen that: A3 -1.8:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. A3 ^2 * 2.25:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Switching Elements as Directional Controls Four logic switching cartridges are required to duplicate the functions of a spool type four-way directional valve; one Cartndge for each port - P, T. A. and B. By controlling me opening and dosing of each element, twelve different flow paths can be obtained. Using logic switching cartridges <t is possible to shift from one flow condition to any other without going through any intermediate (or "center") valve condition or function. Because the opening of the cartridges can be precisely controlled, the logic circuit can anticipate the requirements of the system, allowing flow to shift direction smoothly. By contrast, most spool type directional valves have only three operating positions and must always pass through a center condition when changing from one flow path to another. The opening order and shifting conditions are rigidly fixed by the spool configuration and overlap. Typical logic element four-way directional valve circuits, illustrating pilot-to-dose and pilot-to*-open cartridges are described below. NOTE Bom normally open and normally closed switching cartridges are seated poppet type valve designs, so leakage between pon f and port 2 is essentially zero. All SUN switching cartridges are manufactured witn seats on the pilot piston, eliminating any leakage between trie pitot and work pons Therefore ttner work pon can be seiecied as a source tor seif-pnofng wtnout tear of loss of pressure from the pilot section ot me work pon pon 3 must be tree ot air ana lull ol oil before starting up new systems PILOT TO CLOSE SWITCHING ELEMENTS Typical Circuit pilot to open switching elements Typical Circuit -A3 ilftO* O--|(W ! (cippo- 'j 1 ' I------ Ai-eo 0:-----------1 I At too A1 . too j Epuivalent Spool Valve Symbol A___ B 11 PT hi Log< fwmenr abed 0000 * ----1 AJ*e"*---- _J -----i-OC- 7 --e- - a; _-- -. w A A^ A *` --* - --V-L. * . -x *. Eowvaiem Spool vaive Symbol A___ B PT 1 ^ 1< ELleomgeicnt abed XX X X (Ai.tOC At v t00 __ AtT, <2jl,__ w)L|oo| liil XXXX i <oc rm X 0 X 0 y--a i. too L1 L-Z*J1 rLrJrU, 0 000 0| X 0 X - --O C- .1P O--1 _ 3 0 X 0 X 1 ____ * - 2' 3 X 0 X 0 * |1 $0 ,1. T ^ A--, --1 " n r~ (W 1 1^ A--. *--B sLw . M) j n* --J Li L 1 i_ El X 0 X X '00 --s~ -- i --' J 7iT X X 0 X i 0 X X X Kzl :> 1TiLj1 T l i x xxo X 00X OX X 0 0!0;x|x :* T.--; - ~~--" d;1 To) n--n icl f0 A-- --B Jl*1 --J ,a| fernrrj % ir X X 0 0 d-3 y I~ o - vented x - piloted El 0 X 'i 0 o!x!o rV x! o i o I o 11 0 0 0 X E 0XX0 ~Cm X 0 0 X El X E0 o - vented X00 0XX x - piloted 9.04 00 A 134834 confidential o o IIOO/S^ It'll Solenoid directional controls Solenoid directional valves, two-way two-position (2/2), normally-closed series Functional symbols i| 51 OV4; VTT] (O ------------ 2l--. S/W fy 11 21 S/W ____ sv4 rr 2> wv Typical sections Solenoids omitted SV1 Similar construction for SV2 and SV3 SV1/2/3/4-10(V)-C Model and ordering code SV*-10(V)-C-*-***" * mu piii5i 0 Type See also `Functional symbols" section 1 - Poppet type, two-stage, high flow 2 e Poppet type, two-stage, fast acting 3 = Poppet type, two-stage, free reverse flow 4 " Spool type, direct acting 0 Fluid compatibility Blank * Antiwear Hydraulic oil V " Asaboveorwith phosphate-ester (not alkyl type) 0 Form 0 = Cartndge only In light-duty housing: 207 bar (3000 psO max. 6T * With SAE 6 size ports In NFRA fatigue-rated housing; 207 bar (3000 psi) max. 6H * With SAE 6 size ports Continuedn ntxlcoiirm 8H = With SAE 8 size ports 2G = With G%'(BSPF) size ports 3G = With G%'(BSPF) size ports 0 Voltage rating 00 = No coil 12D 12VDC 24D * 24V DC 36D 36V DC 24A * 24VAC 60/50 Hz 115A *= 115VAC 60 Hz/ 110VAC 50 Hz 230A 230VAC 60/50 Hz Amps -- 1,50 0.75 0.50 0.75 0.16 0.08 Lead color -- Red Black Blue Orange Yellow Red/ White Q] Connector types Blank - No coil G - ISO4400 (DIN 43650) connector. Order requisite connector plug separately: see "Spare parts", two pages on. p = V4" NPTconduit port, with ieadwire O Spade terminal (option tor DC voltages only) W * Leadwire (option for DC and 24VAC only) Operating data Performance data is typical with fluid at 28 cSt (132 SUS) and 38C (100F) Max. pressure, both ports 207 bar (3000 psi) Rated flow: SVl & SV3 models SV2&SV4 models 45 l/min (12 US gpm) 23l/min(6USgpm) Pressure drop characteristics See graphs on next page Electrical characteristics and options See 0 and 0 in "Model code" above, and also page 49 Hydraulic fluids, temperature ranges and filtration recommendations See[z] in "Model code" and also page 266 Installation dimensions, cartridge only See two pages on Cavity size C-10-2 See page 247 for dimensions Mass, cartridge including solenoid 0,4 kg (0.87 lb) approx. Housing options: Standard light duty type Standard fatigue-rated type Customized types See page 255 See page 251 Consult your local sales engineer Spare parts See two pages on D0 A 1348-JS CONFIDENT! A1 .Solenoid directional corrtrc Pressure drop characteristics Cartridges only SV1&SV3 PSI bar 100-1 75- 50- 25- 0 Flow rtt SV2 SV4 PW 100 n 75% 50 25. 0-1 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Wnm 2 4 6 6 10 12 USgpm Row rat* psi bar 100-1 I 75- ! 50- I 25- 0 -> DC A 134836 CONFIDENTIAL Solenoid directional controls Soar* parts_____________________________________________________________________________ The only pans available are: Kit no. a. Seal kits comprising external seals and back-up nngs tor SV-tO-C SK-10-2 SV-1QV-C_______________________________________________ SK-10V-2___________________ b. Solenoid coil ana ancillary pans See page 49 c. ISO/DIN connector plug options: Black, marked B Gray, marked A Pan no. 710775 710776 For dimensions see page 50 00 A 134837 CONFTDFNTT Al Supporting products and informatior Supporting information Hydraulic fluids, temperature ranges, filtration recommendations and contaminant control Spare parts Repair and warranty Hydraulic fluids Usable with All valves with "V" immediately after the nominal size e.g. RV1-10V-* relief valve FR2-16V-* flow control All valves with the "V" omitted e.g. RVl -10-* relief valve FR2-16-* flow control temperature ranges Viscosity/operating temperature envelopes | Options Antiwear hydraulic oils or phosphate esters (not alkyl types) Antiwear hydraulic oils -20 10 38 fl--------------------------------r .... .............. I -4 50 100 tbmpwvtura 85 82 *C i 1i 150 180 *F For general information about the fluids see, for Antiwear hydraulic oils a) Data sheet about hydraulic fluids in industrial applications. Available on request and also in the main Vickers product catalog. b) Fluid suppliers' publications. Phosphate esters a) Fluid suppliers' publications. b) "Guidelines for the use of fire- resistant fluids in hydraulic systems" CETOP publication, available in English, German and French from CETOP members e.g. British Fluid Power Association, London, UK VDMA, Frankfurt/Main-Niederrad W. Germany SCTHP, 16 Avenue Hoche, Paris France. c) `Standard practice for use of fire- Risk of frequent breakdowns under resistant fluids in fluid power the same conditions. systems" ANSI, New York, USA. Production rates below schedule. Filtration recommendations High product scrap rates and quality faults. For consistent, efficient performance, filtration must maintain fluid cleanliness Nature of contaminant to ISO 4406:1986 Class 16/13 or Contaminant can be either particle cleaner. This task is made easier by contaminant or the product(s) of fluid good system design, installation and degradation. maintenance practices as described below. Particle contaminant cap be of metal, Contaminant control rubber, plastic, dirt, dust, fiber, sand, paint, etc.; several types may be Contaminant in hydraulic systems is present at any time. It can enter the fluid now recognized as the most likely at any time after the fresh clean fluid cause of any malfunction or failure of has been shipped by the fluid hydraulic equipment. Dependent on manufacturer. There is usually little the nature, size and/or amount of likelihood that fresh fluid became contaminant it can cause: contaminated during the refining and Machine malfunction, particularly blending processes. when operating toward maximum caoacitv. DO A 1.34838 Continued on next page OONFTDFNTIAI /M i\ ^ 1VTM Fluid degradati n shows in one or more of the following ways: Oxidation and/or the formation of gummy deposits and sludge from the combinecj effects of high temperatures, air, water and particle contaminant. These can increase viscosity, cause gummy deposits to coat moving parts, clog orifices and small passages, thus impairing smooth mechanical Supporting products and information movements, and form sludge. Unstable emulsions of poor lubricity formed when water accidently emulsifies with oil. These impair smooth movements and promote wear, Air bubbles in the fluid, particularly at low pressures. In excess, they cause noise in pumps and valves leading to erratic or spongy machine movements, premature wear and failure. Control of contaminant The table below prescribes preventive measures relative to the different common types and causes of contamination. For a more comprehensive treatise of the subject ask for the Vickers publication "Effective contamination control in fluid power systems", X^ k TM'W Preventive measures Solid contam. For storage barrels Store in cool, dry location. Ensure that bungs or plugs fully seal-in the fluid. Wipe away any dirt and moisture from around the bo^g or plug before loosening and emptying. Use a portable filtration unit for emptying and re-fuimg For storage tanks C install m cool, dry location. 2 Ensure that all covers and stop valves effectively s*a>-oeieiWad Z Kaep filling lines clean, cap anas when not in use ~ Use a portable filtration unrt for filling and emptying For hydraulic systems -- Provide fluid filteds) *1 locabonfs) that ensure me requeue protector - The oeaisteady-state flow conditions through an r*MkvmsMsth a _ "rnusr for most appicatcns Z Whenever possible, use mists havmg element conotcn wacanrs - tfented systems must be fitted with an air breather aoorooneM to the snwonment(s)OTwTvcnthemachineistobeoperaieosnomeaouemerwi _ Crf the System -- Fit strainers to pump eset mot if there is nsk of gross carsamr^m le g stnng. _ rag. screws, etc.) entenng the ktes - Prevent air entenngtne system, particularly througnp^vesettnas Ennse a*-hgnt|Oint3*i any sut>-atmosphenc2oneof pump wet wea Areoenst** that tnose lines and aB ratven and drBm lines termevat# oew ma mewrum flud level m the reservor. p^hp met Imes Should be s^hoWy betow to _ prwant air entering throupi a vortex at low flu*) levers Z Des^n lor. and mamtaei. fad temperatures at opt*r*sn*va tor me appscation. Fit coolers if necessary Locate or screen hydraiAc systems away from h^itempsrstiaaaoiacas g. hanaces. Z Assemble system in dean condftons and by ustfigasanpracbcea. C Pre-dean pipes and reserves enmeoatsry before rtaaation. Cap any ends that cannot immediately be connected to matvig components e.g. between shifts. Remove protective caps orfly just before connectngmabng components. Use a portable filtration unit to fill the reserve* system. Flush new systems, and those that have undergone maior repairs, before commissioning. Temporarily remove cylinders and semi-rotary motors and replace by bridging pipes. Servo valves and similar rvgh precision units should also be replaced by bridging units for flushing operations. Ensure that cylinders and semi-rotary motors are clean internally before connecting to the system. Ensure that air breathers and reservoir covers are at all tones property installed and secured tightly. Stop any leakage of water into the system from coolers or other sources. Make a leak-tight repair. By planned maintenance, ensure that fresh filter elements are fitted (or metallic elements cleaned when appropriate) when indicators or visual inspection shows this to be necessary. Take fluid samples periodically and examine to determine whether effects of particle contaminant, heat, water and air indicate need for more control of those factors or the replacement of the fluid fill. Whenever the reservoir is emptied, clean it out thoroughly and remove all residual contaminant. If necessary, restore protective paint or other finishes. On completion, cap all openings unless the system is to be refilled immediately in which case ensure that air breathers, covers etc., are replaced. Fluid jegradatioiiby- High Water Air temp. * DO A 13483*9 CONFIDENTIAL Parts Identification Parker Series 2A, 2H, 3L, VH Cylind rs For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. DO A 134840 44 CONFIDFNTTAL Parker S r 2A, 2H, 3L, VH Cylinders Parts Identification Seal Kite Group5 service "symbol 14 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 62 119 120 121 DESCRIPTION Gland cartridaa Gland wipersea! Gland lipsaal Piston lipseal Gland back-up washer Piston back-up washer Gland to haad o*rino End seal o-rinq Piston rinq Gland cartndae kit Outer ring Inner rinq Wear rinq 1 SEAL KITS FOR CLASS 5 SERVICE Material: Fluorocarbon (Viton) For operating temperature and fluid compatibility see Section C, page 71. Gland & spanner wrenches are available to ease (rod) seal or gland cartridge removal without disassembly of the cylinder. For detailed seal replacement instructions see service bulletin #0995-M1, M3 & M5. SERIES 2A. 2H. 3L A VH CYLINDERS RG RK ROD DIA. GLAND (SYM. 62) CARTRIDGE KITS CONTAINS SYMBOLS 14, 40, 41, 43 A 45 ROD SEAL KITS CONTAINS SYMBOLS 40.41.43 6 45 GLAND WRENCH SPANNER WRENCH Vi RG2AHL 0055 RK2AHL 0055 069590 0000 011676 0000 H RG2AHL 0065 1 RG2AHL 0105 RK2AHL 0065 RK2AHL 0105 069590 0000 069591 0000 011676 0000 011676 0000 1H RG2AHL 0135 RK2AHL 0135 069592 0000 011703 0000 14b RG2AHL 0175 RK2AHL 0175 069593 0000 011677 0000 2 RG2AHL 0205 2Vi RG2AHL 0255 3 RG2AHL 0305 3V* RG2AHL 0355 4 RG2AHL Q4Q5 4^ RG2AHL 0455 RK2AHL 0205 RK2AHL 0255 RK2AHL 0305 RK2AHL 0355 RK2AHL040S RK2AHL 0455 069594 0000 059595 0000 069596 0000 069597 0000 069596 0000 063877 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 011676 0000 *5 RG2AHL 0505 RK2AHL 0505 069599 0000 011676 0000 *5W RG2AHL 0555 RK2AHL 0555 069600 0000 011676 0000 *RG a RK kits iistad ara not appfccaMe to 10" A 12 bora aarias 2H cytindars Sa Duiiatin 099S-M4 PISTON SEAL OPTIONS RING TYPE PISTON las jnown aDovc) Supplied as standard on series 2H, 3L A VH hydraulic cylinders LIPSEAL TYPE PISTON Supplied as standard on series 2A air cylinders. Less symbol #44 Optional lor series 2H. 3L & VH hydraulic cylinders HI-LOAD TYPE PISTON Optional on series 2H & VH hyd raulic cylinders Not available on senes 2A A 3L cylinders BORE SIZE 1 iVr 2 2Vi 3% 4 5 6 7 6 10 12 14 PK-PISTON SEAL KITS SERIES 2A ONLY CONTAINS 2 EA. SYMBOLS 42 A 47 SERIES JHL 3LL A VHL CONTAINS 2 EA. SYMBOLS; 42, 44 a 47 PK1002A005 PK1502*005 PK2002A005 PK2502A005 PK3202A005 PK4Q02A00S PK5002A005 PK6002A005 PK7002A005 PK8002A005 PK9002A00S PK9202A005 PK9402A005 PK102MLL05 PKI52HLL05 PK202HLL05 RK252HLL05 PK322HLL05 PK*02HLL0S PK502HLL05 PK602MLL05 PK702HLL05 PK802HLL05 PK902HLL05 PK922HLL05 - PR PISTON RING KITS SERIES 2H. 3L A VH CONTAINS 2 SYM. 47 A 4 SYM 44 PRIQ2H0005 ORI52H0005 PR202H0005 PR252H0005 PR322H0005 PR402M0005 PR502M0005 PR602M0005 PR702H0005 PR802H0O05 PR902HQ005 RR922H0005 - HI-LOAD PISTON SEAL KITS SERIES 2H A VH CONTAINS 2 EA. SYMBOLS 119. 120 A 121 PK1S2HK005 PK202HK00S PK252HK005 PK322HK005 PK402HK005 PK502HK005 PK602HK00S PK702HK005 PK802HK005 PK902HK005 PK922HK005 -- BORE SIZE 1 IVr 2 21* 3V4 4 5 6 7 6 10 12 14 CB-CYLINCEH BODY SEAL KITS SERIES 2A SERIES 2H. 3L A VH CONTAINS 2 EA. CONTAINS 2 EA. SYMBOL 47 SYMBOL 47 CB102HL005 CB152HL005 CB102HLQ05 CB152HL005 CB202HL00S CB252HL005 CB202HL005 CB252HL005 CB322HL005 USE (PK) PISTON SEAL , KITS FOR THESE SIZES CB402HL005 CB502HL005 CB602HL005 CB702HL005 CB802HL005 CB902HL00S CB922HL005 -- TIE ROD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS (FT. LBS.) SERI fS 2A STEEL BRASS CYL. BODY CYL. BODY SERIES 2H A VH SERIES 3L 2 1-- 2 5 3 18 5 11 6 45 11 11 6 45 11 25 16 120 25 25 16 130 25 60 45 310 60 60 45 525 60 90 -- 790 -- 110 BO 1160 110 150 115 2500 -- 172 150 526 -- 275 230 -- -- For use with High Water Content Fluids. Class 6 Service: kit numbers listed above identify Class 5 seals only. Tb order with Class 6 seals (HWCF) substitute "6" for "5" as last digit of part number. How to order--individual seals contained in the kits are available separately--however we recommend purchasing complete kits because ol convenience & lower replacement cost. When ordering seal kits give part number listed above To be sure of exact replacement give serial number ol cylinder when orderino replacement kits or seals. Cylinder Division 500 So Wolf Road Das Plaines, IL 50016 708/298-2400 Rational Plants a Santa Pa Springs, CA 310/698-0965 a Enfield, CT 203/749-2215 a Atlanta, GA 404/349-0563 m Goodiand, IN 219/297*3182 a Plymouth, Ml 3(3/455-1700 Hillsborough. NC 919/732-6183 a Hillsborough, NC 919/732-9371 Akron, OH 218/253-4500 a Portland, OR 503/2B5-0684 a Owen Sound. Ont. Can 519/371*2662 a Toronto, Ont Can. 416/255-4567 a Lachma, Quebec, Can. 514/631-3995 Motion & Control DO A 134841 CONFIDENTIAL TS-2000 Gland Seal Kits Parker Hydraulic Cylinders Gland Seal Kits For Hydraulic Cylinders (Gland Cartridges & Rod Seals, including TS-2000 Rod Seals) For Series H, 2H, 7" & 8" Bore 3H, VH, L, 2L & 3L Hydraulic Cylinders RG (symbol 62) contains 1 each o< the following Symbol t4, gtano. threaded cartridge type symbol 40. rod Wiperseai symbol 41, rod Lipsaai symbol 45. O-nog gland to bead sea' Installs In Rod End ROD SEAL KIT RK kit contains t each ot the toiiowmg Symbol 40 rod Wiperseai symbol 41, rod Lipseai symbd< 45 O-nng giartd to head seal Service kits of expendable parts lor hydraulic cylinders are stocked in principal industrial locations across the U.S.A. and other countries. For prompt delivery and complete information. contact your nearest Parker Hannifin distributor or office Standard Seals -- Class 1 Service Kits are standard, and contain polyurethane and Buna-N seals for standard hydraulic service. These seals are suitable lor use when hydraulic (mineral-type) oil is the operating medium. The recom mended operating temperature range lor Class 1 seals is -10F (-23C) to +165F (+74C). The seals contained in these kits are supplied as standard on all Series 2H: VH, 3L and 7* and 8` bore 3H cylinders manufactured after Sept. 30. 1990 for Class 1 hydraulic (mineral) oil service. The seals contained in these kits are interchangeable for hydraulic (mineral) oil service on all Series HI 2H^ VH, L, 2L and 31 cylinders manufactured prior to Sept. 30,1990. Class 1 Hydraulic Oil Service Only Rod Dia. V V V iv I1/ 2* 2V 3* 3V A' 4V 5* 5V Gland Cartridge Kits (Sym *62) Class 1 (Std.) Buna-N (Nitrile) 4 Polyurethane RG2HLTS051 RG2HITS061 RG2HLTS101 RG2HLTS131 RG2HLTS171 RG2HLTS201 RG2HLTS251 RG2HLTS301 RG2HLTS351 RG2HLTS401 RG2HLTS451 RG2HLTS501 RG2HLTS551 Rod Seel Kits Ciess 1 (Std.) Buna-N (Nitrile) 4 Polyurethane RK2HLTS051 RK2HLTS061 RK2HLTS101 RK2HLTS131 RK2HLTS171 RK2HLTS201 RK2HLTS251 RK2HLTS301 RK2HLTS3S1 RK2HLTS401 RK2HLTS451 RK2HLTS501 RK2HLTS551 *The kite listed above do not fit 10* & 12* bore Series H 4 2H Hydraulic Cylinders. See Bulletin #0995-M4. For additional information - call y ur local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. 48 DO A 13484? CONFTDFNTTAl. Parker Hydraulic Cylinders TS-2000 Gland S al Kits How To Replac Cylinder Gland Packing Fluid leakage around piston rod at the gland area will normally indicate a need to replace gland seals. First, remove cylinder from machine to which it ts mounted .or. if this is not feasible, disconnect the piston rod from rod clevis, knuckle or machine member to which it is fastened. The Parker Hannifin 'Jewel' gland is a unique cartndge design consisting of a bronze gland, primary lipseal and double lip wiperseal. It is threaded into the gland retainer plate, and all sizes are removable without disturb ing the tie rod torque. To remove the gland: a) Inspect the piston rod to make sure it is tree of burrs or other dis placed metal which would prevent sliding the gland off of the rod. b) For most cylinders, unscrew the gland (right hand thread) from the gland retainer plate. On 7' and 6* bore series 3H, all JJ mounting styles and 8' bore low pressure hydraulic cylinders remove the socket head cap screws securing the round or square retainer plate. The gland protrudes from the face of the retainer and can be removed with vice grip pliers. Or use a Parker Hannifin gland and spanner wrench Shown in me table below Installation Before installing a new gland, inspect the surface of the piston rod for scratches, burrs, dents or other damage. A damaged piston rod surface will result in premature rod seal failure. Lubricate the bore of the gland and the teals, and Slide the gland over the end of the piston rod. Thread the gland into the retainer until it is seated firmly against the head. The gland-to-head O-ring. Sym. #45, serves as a torque prevailing lock. THE SEALS ABE PRESSURE ACTUATED, SO NO FURTHER ADJUST MENTS ARE NECESSARY. When teowemg a gumo on a rod when is treaded to the full diameter or so snapeo mat 4 couta damage me seats a slight rotary motion of the giand mil help prevent damage In addition, because lull-diameter threads are usua#y suooiieo with the crest of the threads slightly truncated a piece of arum stock or other mm. tough material can be wrapped around me threads to help protect the gland seals when thuy are be<ng passed over the threads c) Slice me gland off of me piston rod and remove me ***> Tnofougrwy clean tne gland and seal grooves Inspect gland bore lor wea> it bore is worn, replace -- using gland cartridge (RGI kit complete anm seals d) If gland IS not worn, replace seals only using rod seal (RKt mt Lubricate gland seal grooves and all new seals Install wperseai Sym #40. in groove closest to end of gland Install iipseai Sym #41. in seal groove. Lips of seal should point toward Ota long bearing side of the gland. e) An O-ring, Sym #45. is supplied with each gland carinoge ml It serves as a seal between the gland and the head This O-nng is a static seal and does not normally require replacement The onpnsi O-ring may be left in place, unless it is known to be leasing (fluid flow around gland thread) Cylinder Bore Sue r f r 2Y 3'.' 4* 5* 6' r Retainer Bolt Torque For Cylinders with Round or Small Square Gland Retainer Bolt Dla. 3(16" Torque 15 In. Lbs. 1/4" 60 In. Lbs 5/16' 10 Ft. Lbs. 3/8' 20 Ft. Lbs 7/16" 35 Ft. Lbs 8* Gland Cartridge Wrenches Rod Dla. W V r iv IV 2' Gland Wrench (Symbol 63) 069590 0000 069590 0000 069591 0000 069592 0000 069593 0000 069594 0000 Spanner Wrench Symbol 63-A) 011676 0000 011703 0000 011677 0000 011677 0000 Tie Rod Nut Torque (Ft. Lbs.) Cylinder Series L - 2L - 3L 2 5 11 11 25 25 60 L - 2L * 244 3L 60 -- L-2L513 3L * 110 H - 2H VH - 3H -- 16 45 45 120 130 310 525 790 1160 Rod Dla. 2V 3' 3Y 4' 5' 5V Gland Wrench (Symbol 63) 069595 0000 069596 0000 069597 0000 069598 0000 069599 0000 069600 0000 Spanner Wrench i Symbol 63-A) 011677 0000 011678 0000 Cylinder Division 500 So Wolf Road Das Plaines, IL 60016 706/296*2400 Regional Plante a Santa Fa Springs, CA 310/698-0965 a Enfield, CT 203/749-2215 a Atlanta, GA 404^40. nnti'i a Goodland. IN 219/297-3182 a Plymouth, Ml 3(3/455-1700 a Hillsborough. NC (Accum) 919/732-6163 a Hillsborough, NC 919/732-9371 a Akron, OH 216/253*4500 a Portland. OR 503/285-0664 a Owen Sound. Ont Can. 519/371-2662 a Toronto, Out Can 416/255*4567 a Lachin#. Quebec, Can A \348AD DO t r\CMT T Al. Motion & Control INSTALLATION AND SERVICE manual D D INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL CONTAMINATION RESISTANT ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC SERVOVALVES The Parker BD series servovalves are ruggedly de signed specifically for use in the industrial market place. From its inception, over twelve years ago, the first stage amplifier (pilot valve) has established a solid history of trouble-free operation in very harsh environments. Minimum orifice diameters up to 20 times larger than other servovalves models substan tially increase reliability by reducing problems due to contamination. The second stage is a closed center, four-way spool and sleeve which features rectangu lar slots in the sleeve. The spool metering edges exactly match the flow slot edges in the sleeve to provide linear flow with respect to electrical input. The valves have rated flows up to 30 GPM. OPERATION The BO senes servovalves operate on a force feedback pmape between the second stage spooi metering valve and the Int stage pilot valve torque motor. The pilot valve b s angle jet pressure recovery unit that effects a continuing stream of control fad nto a receiver. The receiver has two octets that are ported to the ends of the valve main spoof, PC' and PC? The pressure in these ports is equal when me fad jet b centensd n the recetver opening The feedback spnng attached to the armature measures spoof positron as a force. This tome and the loroe of the torque motor armature provide the error doplacement of the armaare and (rs diverter blade window The window edges (Ken the jet stream to the proper receiver outlet to position Vie spool to the doctneafty commanded position (INITIAL SPOOL MOVEMENT) An tcfncai signal applied to the pilot valve coil generates a magnate tome on the armature/drverter blade assembly, pwoang me assembly and allowing fluid to flow into PCi. See Fgur* i TNs positions the main power spool to the left irtt me tome from the feedback spring matches the magnate force At this time the diverter Wade is recentered over the recervmg onflees. and the spool motion stops at tvs posAon Row. proportional to the input electrical current b men metered out the C? port. Removal of the ewctncl signal to me coil unbalances the forces, which reverses me armature deflection and drives the spool to me zero current or null position, as shown in Figure 2. Changing the potanty of the current to the coil causes a magnehc tome m the opposite direction that results in flow from me Ci port ' , (NULL POSITION) FIGURE 1. SERVOVALVE OPERATION COMMAND FOR FLOW FROM CONTROL PORT C, Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valv Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 FIGURE 2. SERVOVALVE OPERATION - NULL POSITION, VALVE IN BALANCE F' * 2 DO A 134845 CONFTDFNTTAL Fluidpower INSTALLATION INFORMATION EXTERNAL NULL ADJUST OPERATING PRESSURE OECAlTO BE APPLIED On name plate SURFACE TO BE CLEAN AND DRY m CONTROL PORT 1 0 093 DIA PIN ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR MATES WITH MS 3106-14S-2S ----- 01 106 (0 JD J 009 NOM 012S MAX RETURN PORT LOCATING PIN 0 003 INCH DiA --1 CONTROL PORT 2 PILOT- PRESSURE TEST PORT SAE STRAIGHT THD -4 TUBING PRESSURE PORT 0 328 DiA MOUNTING HOLES 4 PlCS TORQUE MOTOR COIL pmp| B ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR FLOW OUT Ci .APPLY CURRENT TO PIN B BD15 INSTALLATION DATA WEIGHT PORT DIAMETER MOUNTING SCREWS, SOC.HD.CAP, TOROUE 0-RING GROOVES 2 6 LBS 0.375 IN 5/16-IBTHx TOO LONG 110 to 150 IN. LB. 0.560 DIA. x 0.052 DEEP 0-RING SIZE ELECT CONNECTOR MATES WITH MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE: ELECTRICAL INPUT (STD VALVE) COIL RESISTANCE (STD. VALVE) 2-013 MS3106-14S-2S 3000 PSI - 60 MA (FULL FLOW) 60 - 6 OHMS NOTES: 1 SERVOVALVE MATING SURFACE TO BE FLAT WITHIN 0.002 INCH TIR, AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN 63 RMS. 2. SERVOVALVE MOUNTING SCREWS ARE TO BE TORQUED TO 110-150 IN.-LBS. ABOVE RUN DOWN TORQUE. 3. FOR PROPER ORIFICE SELECTION AND DECAL PART NUMBER. REFER TO TABLE 2. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 00 A 134846 3 OONFTDFNTTAl Ruidpower INSTALLATION INFORMATION TORQUE MOTOR COIL AB ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PINS FOR FLOW OUT Ci,APPLY + CURRENT TO PIN B BD30 INSTALLATION DATA WEIGHT PORT DIAMETER MOUNTING SCREWS. SOC.HD.CAP. TORQUE 3-RING GROOVES 6.3 LBS. 0.500 IN. 5/16-18x3.25 LONG 110 to 150 IN. LB 0.866 DlA.x 0.052 DEEP 0-RING SIZE ELECT. CONNECTOR MATES WITH MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE: ELECTRICAL INPUT (STD. VALVE) COIL RESISTANCE (STD. VALVE) 2-018 MS3106-14S-2S 3000 PSI a 60 MA (FULL FLOW) 60 s 6 OHMS NOTES: 1. SERVOVALVE MATING SURFACE TO BE FLAT WITHIN 0.002 INCH TIR. AND SMOOTH TO WITHIN 63 RMS. 2. SERVOVALVE MOUNTING SCREWS ARE TO BE TORQUED TO 110-150 IN.-LBS. ABOVE RUN DOWN TORQUE. 3. FOR PROPER ORIFICE SELECTION AND DECAL PART NUMBER. REFER TO TABLE 2. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 4 DO A 104847 CONFIDENTIAL Ruidpower SERVOVALVE INSTALLATION For maximum valve and system component life, the hydraulic system should be flushed and filtered to an absolute filtration of 25 ji m before installing the servovalve. A flushing block should be used in place of the valve while cleaning the system. These blocks are available from Hydraulic Valve Division, as follows: BD15 - PN 810099 BD30-PN 820099 To keep contaminants from entering the servovalve and/ or hydraulic system, keep the valve shipping cover w place until immediately prior to installation. Never leave the port surfaces uncovered and exposed to contamination. A permanent non-bypass filter should be installed in the system to assure that the valve receives a clean supply of oil. The valve should be mounted as close as possible to the actuator or motor it can be mounted in any plane, but it it best to have the spool as nearly horizontal as possible The servovalve Should be set up for the system operating pressure according to the instructions in the OPERATING PRESSURE portion ot the SERVOVALVE MAINTENANCE section Aher installing me servovalve it must be determined rf me valve and its electronics are phased properly Tmt can t>e accomplished by noting servovalve response to a change m input command It mere i$ no servova'e response, the two electrical leads to me valve must be interchanged to correct an out-of-phase condition NULL ADJUSTMENT If it is desired to have the actuator go to a pieteneo position with electrical power oft (electrical failure) a nun offset adjustment can be made to make sure me actuator moves to the desired position To adiust the vaive null, the following procedure should be used. 1. Remove the screw from the null adjust access hole in me valve cover, (see installation drawing lor its location). 2. Make sure the actuator or motor is unobstructed m case it were to move its load fully in either direction 3. Disconnect the electrical connector on the valve 4. Apply the rated supply pressure to the valve 5. Insert a nonmagnetic 1/16 inch hex wrench into the access hole and engage the adjusting screw. (A magnetic wrench can be used but must be moved out of the hole after each adjustment to determine if the desired position has been achieved). The screw can be rotated in either direction until the desired result is obtained. (Actuator motion stops, retracts, etc.). The adjustmeni available is 10 to 15% of full valve stroke througT approximately 4 turns of the screw, The screw is trapped on either end so it cannot come out; however, i: should not be overtightened at the ends of its travel. The adjusting screw locking device offers resistance tc turning or moving on its own. 6. After adjustment replace the access hole sealing screw. DITHER If the system resolution is not as precise as desired, it can sometimes be improved through the use of "dither". A small amplitude signal at a relatively high (60-150 Hz) frequency is superimposed on the valve command signal This signal will cycle the valve spool at this higher frequency sufficiently to prevent valve "silting" and "stiction' It should be noted however, that if the amplitude is high enough, or the frequency low enough, me aeutator could respond to the signal m such a way mat would wear the seals rapidly Therefore, care should be exercized in setting the frequency and amplitude of me 0>mer If dither does not solve the problem, the feedback device may be the limiting factor, or the servovalve may be sized too large for the accuracy desired SERVOVALVE MAINTENANCE GENERAL Tins tecum provides maintenance instructions for the BD Ser*s servovalves. Except to orifice changing and filter removal, cleaning and remstaiiation. field disassembly of the servovalves snoutd never be attempted. FILTER MAINTENANCE If the valve performance appears sluggish or exhibits slow overshooting, the valve filter would be the first thing to check. It can be serviced as follows: 1. Wipe the surface around valve mounting flange as clean as possible, then loosen the four bolts securing valve to mounting pad. 2. Remove the valve, taking care not to set uncovered port flange of servovalve on a contaminated surface. 3. Inspect the port flange carefully, and if necessary, remove contamination using a clean wiper. Make certain that contamination is prevented from entering ojsen fluid ports. 4. Using the special wrench 820000TF3-1 remove filter cartridge. See Figure 3. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division DO A 134848 CONFIDENTIAL. Ruidpower *0* SUPPLY PRESSURE PORT FIGURE 3. FILTER CARTRIDGE REMOVAL 5 Clean filler by soaking in tncioroethylene or other suitable solvent for 5 minutes, and blow dry from the inside out using filtered dry compressed air. 6 Be sure cartridge is dry and free from solvent before reinstalling 7 inspect filter for cleanliness and damage to screen. 8 Position filter in servovalve cavity using the 820000TF3-1, wrench. 9 Tighten filter to 15-30 in. lbs above run down torque 10 Install servovalve on mounting pad. Refer to pages 3 or 4 as required for installation. PILOT OPERATING PRESSURE The servovalve pilot stage operates on a relatively con stant supply pressure. The pilot supply pressure should be approximately 450 psi. This pressure is established by placing an orifice between the servovalve supply pressure and the pilot valve. The orifice, part number 8100006, is located under the filter shown in Figure 3. Table 2 shows the color coding, the dash number and the servovalve supply pressure range recommended for each particular orifice, it is important that the proper orifice be selected for the system pressure being applied to the servo. Improper orifice selection may over pressurize the pilot or result in very sluggish performance. To check or change the orifice, remove the filter as described in maintenance section. The top of the orifice should be visible when the filter is removed. It can be removed with a small blade screwdriver. The valve is set up to operate within a pressure range that can be verified by the dash number on the orifice. Should it be decided to change this pressure range, a suitable new orifice must be selected and then installed as follows: 1. Lightly lubricate the new O-ring, with hydraulic fluid. 2. Install orifice in pressure port, and snug down with a straight-slot screwdriver. Care should be taken to select a screwdriver whose blade is not so wide that it will damage the threads in the housing. 3. Install filter as described in the FILTER MAINTENANCE section. USE OF TEST PORT The -4 Test port is provided should a verification of pilot valve supply pressure be desired. To use this port, the -4 plug must be removed, and replaced with* a -4 tube fitting and suitable pressure gage. When system supply pressure is applied to the servovalve, the pressure indicated on the pressure gage is pilot valve supply pressure This pressure should be 350 to 600 psi with the valve at null The test pod may be also be used as an alternate pilot supply port by installing a blank supply orifice, -00 (red) in the valve body The pilot supply pressure should be set between 450 psi and 500 psi. Special care must be taken to assure tnat this source is provided with a 25m filter m it It should be noted that the tank line from the pilot is toined inside the valve with the 2nd stage tank line ELECTRICAL CHECKOUT These instructions are for a standard valve. Valves with other coils should be checked to +10% of the rated resistance of the valve 1 Using a standard ohmmeter. check the servovalve lead resistance 2. Check the coil resistance as follows: a. Attach ohmmeter leads to pin A and pin B. Coil resistance should read between 54 ohms and 66 ohms. b. There shall be no continuity between either pin and servovalve case. c. If coil resistance is greater than 66 ohms or less than 54 ohms, return the servovalve to the factory. BACK PRESSURE During normal hydraulic system operation, back pressure in the return system (tank line) is approximately 25 psi. Excessive back pressures due to clogged filters, system contamination, system out of trim etc., impose undesired forces on system components, and add significantly to the work required to move a load. Energy is being wasted and system components are being overworked. Back pressures in excess of 200 psi should be investigated immediately and the discrepancies corrected. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Cltrrip Ohin 440?^ 00 A 134849 CONFTDFNTT Al Fluidpower FIELD SERVICE SUGGESTIONS Initial Check ut Procedure . 1. Remove the electrical cable from the valve and con nect pins A & B to a hand held power source (a 1 1/2 to 9 volt battery with a potentiometer to vary the input will do.). 2. Operate the valve with the hand held power source. If the indicated problem cannot be duplicated, the mal function is more than likely in the wiring, controller or hydraulic system. 3. If the valve does exhibit the problem, refer to Table 1 for service suggestions. Symptoms Servovalve does not follow input command. (Actuator or motor is stopped.) Sluggish valve (Servovalve output lags electrical command Signal or it fails to meet its rated output.) High null bias (high input current required to maintain actuator or motor stationary.) Output flow obtained from one port (Actuator hard over no response to servo command.) Very high flow to cyl. port with little or no current input. Oscillation or hunting motion of acutator in the closed loop system. Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 TABLE 1. SERVICE SUGGESTIONS Possible Causes 1) Open coil wire or open coil lead to connector pin. 2) Totally plugged supply orifice or filter 3) Spool Stuck f) Partially plugged a Filter element b Orifice c Pilot Valve 2) Leaky sleeve *0`tings 3) Low pilot Supply pressure 4) Cylinder piston ring failure 5) Shoned coil 6) Low supply pressure 1) Incorrect null adjust 2) Pantally plugged receiver To Verify or Correct 1) Check lead and coil resistance. If there is an 'open", remove the connector and check it's solder joints Resolder if required 2) Remove and inspect filter and orifice per Maintenance Section 3) Return to factory 1) a Remove and inspect filter per Maintanance Section b Remove and inspect orifice per Maintenance Section C Return to factory 2) Investigate excessive internal leakage to tank (bypassing flow sound) i 3) Check pilot supply pressure per Maintenance Section 4) Check cylinder (listen for bypassing sound) 5) Check coil resistance in accord ance with Maintenance Section. Electrical Checkout 6) Verify that the supply pressure to the valve falls within the range noted on the valve nameplate 1) Adjust null per Servovalve Maintenance Section. 2) Return valve to factory 1) Valve improperly phased 2) Plugged pilot valve receiver port 3) Spool stuck. 1) Pilot valve malfunction. 1) Swap the two leads to the valve coil to change the polarity of the current to the coil. 2) Return valve to factory 3) Return valve to factory. 1) Return to factory. 1) Valve drive electronics gain set too high or some other misadjustment. 2) Pantally plugged orifice or filter. 3) Sticky spool. 1) Reset electronics. See electronics installation manual 1460 IM. 2) Check pilot pressure at test port and/or remove, inspect and clean orifice/filter jjer Servovalve Maintenance Section. 3) Return valve to factory. 7 DO A 134850 CONFIDENTIAL Ruidpower TABLE 2. ORIFICE SELECTION AND OROERING INFORMATION KIT NUMBER* 810014-00" 810014-16 810014-18 810014-20 810014-22 810014-33 810014-50 PRESSURE RANGE (PSD EXT. PILOT 0 TO 3000 2600 - 3000 2000 - 2550 1400 - 1950 1000 - 1350 700 - 950 200 - 650 COLOR CODE RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW ORANGE BLACK WHITE "Kits include the orifice, an O-ring (PN: 5*103) and the proper decal to be applied to the valve name plate Viton O-ring kits are also available; order Parter Number 810013-XX. "This Pad Number is a blank with no hole. It is used when an external pilot fluid source is supplied to the test port. FOR APPLICATION ASSISTANCE, CONTACT OUR NEAREST REGIONAL SALES OFFICE CALIFORNIA IRVINE. CA (714) 660-7033 GEORGIA MARIETTA, GA (404) 956-8994 OHIO OHIO CLEVELAND, OH CINCINNATI, OH (216)531-3000 (513)793-2011 ILLINOIS DES PLAINES. IL (708) 298-2400 MICHIGAN TROY. Ml (313) 589-2400 . TEXAS RICHARDSON, TX (214)2333020 CANADA TORONTO. ONT. (416)255-7371 NEW ENGLAND SMITHTOWN, NY (516) 231-3737 . - ~ - - A WARNING - : -- r FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR PROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS ANDADfl SYSTBtS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED TTEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONALINJURY AND PROPEHTYDAMAGE.;* \ Tfxs document and other irrformaljon from Parker Hanrifiri Corporaboa. Its stfcsxSaries and authorized (Ss&ixflnra provicle product and/or system options for bather investigation by users having technical expense. It-is kiyalatf that you analyze afl aspects of your apptcation incfcjdng consequences of any talure, and review the information concerning the predict or system in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conations and appBcteions for these products orsystems. the user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsMe formaking the tinal selection of the producte and systems and essirtig that all performance, safety and warning toq^amenfl of the appfication are met The ptDtfctdsdeanfcedhereei.inctidingwM>outimi>teion.product feakses;specffication&.dasiyis,aaiabilityid pricing, era abject to change by Parker Hannifin Corporation and its stAskkaries at anytime without notice. Offer of Sale The items describedin this document are hereby offered torsaie by Parker Hanra&n Corporation, fis subsaciaries orits authorized distrjxrtors. This . ofter am its acceptance are governed by the provisions,stated inplter of Sate*, published svtoe Prioe List P12S50. Please contacttoe Hytkauic AMve Division for more MormaHon. - ` iqs am im Parker Hannifin Corporation Hydraulic Valve Division 520 Temes Avenue Elyria, Ohio 44035 (oiRt n DO A dfnttal. conf t RuidDOwer 1/001B6 PILOT-TO-CLOSE SWITCHING ELEMENT WITH DIFFERENTIAL AREA POPPET Refer to page 9.02 lor further technical information. Bi-directional operation with sealed pilot for zero leakage. 5000 psi maximum operating pressure. 0 to 25 GPM Nominal Series 1 Cartridge T-11A Cavity Installation Torque 30 to 35 lb. ft. 0 to 50 GPM Nominal Series 2 Cartridge T-2A Cavity Installation Torque 45 to 50 lb. ft. .98 in. . Across Comers (.88 in. Hex) ' Port r?) 'Maximum Extension from Locating Shoulder. 1.19 in ,___I_ Locating 1 * Shoulder 1.38 in 1.30 m. Across Comers *"* (1.12 in. Hex) Port '3 Port 2 Pon 1 Maximum Extensa from Locating Shoulder. 1.38 in, __? Locating Shoulder 1.38 in Port 3 pilot displacement * ,ot m3 Area at Pon 3 is i .8 times the area at Pon i, Leakage rate less man 5 droos'mm Pon 3 pilot displacement > .07 in3 Area at Pon 3 is i .8 times the area at Pod i, Leakage rate less than 5 drops/min. TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS an orifice, regardless of variations in upstream or downstream pressure. The orifice may be fixed or variable, including the variable orifice created by proportional type directional valves. Modulating cartridges can serve as main stage pressure controls to handle high flows with a low flow pilot circuit to control the performance of the cartridge. This allows a great deal of flexibility in creating a variety of operating conditions during a machine cycle. Functions such as multiple control pressures and venting or deventing can be incorporated at appropriate points in the cycle, using small solenoid operated valves. Switching Cartridges SUN offers two basic logic switching cartridges: p<>otto-open (LK'C) and pilot-to-close (LO'C). Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas A1 or A2, tends to open the valve. The bias spring force, together with pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to close the valve. Depending on the direction of flow, pilot-to-close switching valves open when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the force affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will open to either direction of flow when pressure at port 1 or port 2 is high enough to overcome the bias spring force. For example: Pressure required to open at port 1 = 50 psi Pressure required to open at port 2 = 65 psi When pilot pressure is applied at port 3. this pressure , acting on A3 (plus the bias spring force), tends to hold the vaive oosed The valve may then be opened by venting the >>of pon (3) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately f.ghe' pressure at pon 1 or port 2. From the area ratios "Sted above can be seen that: Pi*x to-ooec 1 Put* io-ao*e i 8 i or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. Switching cartridges are unoaianced poppet. two-wa valves with a third (pilot) port to control poppet operation The unoaianced poppet can be operated; 2 25 i or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. A) directly by pressure at either work port B) by pilot pressure from an external source NOTE: Because of their unbalanced poppet design the oowato^ O* SUN s switching cartridges is pressure depenoent The Opening and oosing movements of the poppet are functions o> tn tore* balances on three areas - port 1. port 2, and pon 3 NOTE: Because logic switching canndges are pressure responsive at all three pons, it is essential to consider an aspects o* the system operation through a complete cycle when oesgnng logic circuits. If pressure changes on any pon are o< suticwnt magnitude, they may cause a valve element to switch from a closed to open condition, or vice versa. All possible pressure changes in the complete circuit cycle must be considered to assure a safe functional system design. Operation of LO*C Area Ratios Port 1 Area (A1) -- 100% Port 2 Area (A2) - 80% Pon 3 Area (A3) - 180% Area Ratios a! "2.25:1 I- (3j A3. ]____ D-(2;^^ in@ , Al . 100 A2-60 A3 - 160 02 (?) Pilot-to-Close Switching Cartridge LO'C Operation of LK*C Area Ratios egr i AreaiAlia 100% -on 2 Area iA21 80% Port 3 Araa IA3) a 100% Area Ratios A3 Al 1.8.1 A3 A2 2.25:1 jc_t -f2' A3. ISC A2 80 Pilot-to-Open Switching Cartridge LK*C Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas Al or A2, plus the bias spring force, tends to close the valve or add to the closing force. Pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to open the valve. Pilot-to-open switching cartridges close when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the forces affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will close and remain closed regardless of the pressure at port 1 or port 2. 9 03 -------------------------------------- DO A 134853 -- CONFTDFNTTAL TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure, acting on A3 (minus the bias spring force), tends to open the valve. The valve may be closed by venting port 3 (pilot) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios listed above, it can be seen that: A3 ^ -1.8:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. A3 A2 * 2.25:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the va*ve against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Swttchlng Elements as Directional Controls Four logc switching cartnOges are required to duptcm Vw functions of a spoof type lour-way directional vatve one canndge for each port - P. T. A. and B By controfong rw opanmg and dosmg of each element twelve different bow paths can be obtained Usmg 109c switching cartndges possible to shift from one flow condition to any other without going through any intermediate (or "center") valve condition or function. Because the opening of the cartridges can be precisely controlled, the logic circuit can anticipate the requirements of the system, allowing flow to shift direction smoothly. By contrast, most spool type directional valves have only three operating positions and must always pass through a center condition when changing from one flow path to another. The opening order and shifting conditions are rigidly fixed by the spool configuration and overlap. Typical logic element four-way directional valve circuits, Ikjstratmg pilot-to-dose and pilot-to-open cartridges are deserted below MOTE Bom normally open and normally closed switching carnages are tatted poppet type valve designs, so leakage between pon 1 and pon 2 is essentially zero. All SUN switching canroget are manufactured with seats on the pilot piston, e-nwvsting any leakage between the pilot and work ports Tne*e*ore amer wok port can be selected as a source tor an p-oting wenout tear of loss of pressure from the pilot section of me pon Pan 3 must oe tree 01 air and lull of oil before stanmg uC new systems PILOT TO CLOSE SWITCHING ELEMENTS Typical Cbcuft PILOT TO OPEN SWITCHING ELEMENTS Typical Circuit * ** ! m K-0 0* I ------ fouses Scow ve*e Srmew __ B Logc Element abed A' * A * 0C At a 1QC At a t OOP XXX 1 ___ 1 I l ___ -AJ. ISO- Tt-- T 0X0 -- 3 XOX liii X O X X m X XOX --1 * -o<------- * *m. * *- AJ*0t - A* . tQC A' 0C At too -oci t* OO-J L W) -A3* tiO--w Eamvaam Spool vaive Symooi a__ e Logic Element P---- T E' abed X XXX 1 - *1 LwaJ Ei OOOO OX 0 X a X; 0 X|0 0 2 0X 0 0 xio 1-- n 1 ILL 0 OXXX Of 2L X X X 0 --L ; E) X O 0X d' I A --^ (b) L___ __ ' ps 0 OX X 0 03 XX r1- b ^ L,(D i(D El X oio 0 0 0 [0 0 0 0 OjX 0XX 0 X 00X X X 00 0 0:0 0 0 0X X 0 - vented x - piloted 0 - vented x - piloted 9.04 00 A 134854 CONFIOFNITAL oT 0 Needle Valve Application The NV101 Series Needle Valves provide speed control and shutoff where a reverse flow check is not required. Operation The valve acts as a fixed orifice in a hydraulic circuit. The effective size of the orifice increases as the tapered needle is opened. Shutoff is provided when fully closed. Flow can be metered with this cartridge in either direction. Features Hardened operating parts for long life Compact cartridge design Fine thread on needles for precise adjustment Installation Data See the Installation tnlormation section of this catalog tor specific recommendations pertaining to system cleanliness, fluids, seals and other important factors relative to the proper installation and use of these products. Performance Curve Controlled Flow vs. Pressure Drop (Needle Full Open) (Through cartridge only. For performance of bodies, see section MV). J\O0\%6 &(& N edle Valves Series NV101 n~ i "> i >\< i (2) Metered Flow--Either Direction Cartridge Valve Specifications Nominal Flow Rating 16 GPM (60 L/M) Max Operating Pressure 3500 PSI (245 Bar) Max. Shutoff Leakage at 5 drops/min. (1/3 cc/min.) Rated Pressure & Flow Max. Effective Orifice Area .062 in2 Operating Temp. Range (Ambient) ~40F io + 200F (Nitrile) -25F to + 250F (Viton) Cartridge Material Body Material All parts steel. All operating parts hardened steel Steel Filtration Mounting ISO Code 16/13, SAE Class 4 or better No Restrictions Cavity Common Cavity No. Cl 0-2 (See Cavity Details section) 0 2 4 6 B 10 12 14 16 0 7.6 15 23 30 38 45 53 FLOW (In -- Out, Full Open) 61 For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. DO A 134855 CONFIDENTIAL Inches Dimensions (Millimeters) Cartridge Only Needle Valv s Series NV101 Cartridge in Body Hydraulic Valve Division Elyria, Ohio 44035 DO A 134856 CONFIDENTIAL MnfW't R, C'nnlrni PILOT-TO-OPEN SWITCHING ELEMENT ^^ WITH DIFFERENTIAL AREA POPPET Refer to page 9.02 for further technical information. Bi-directional operation with sealed pilot for zero leakage. With no pilot signals, flow is blocked in both directions. 0 to 60 GPM Nominal Series 3 Cartridge T-17A Cavity Installation Torque 150 to 160 lb. ft. 0 to 120 GPM Nominal Series 4 Cartridge T-19A Cavity Installation Torque 350 to 375 lb. ft. 1.56 in. Maximum Diameter {1.25 in. Hex) Port (3) Port (2) ) Maximum Extension !_ from Locating Shoulder. 1.81 in. I >___1 Locating 1 T Shoulder 1.81 in. 2.06 in. Maximum Diameter (1.62 in. Hex) Port (T Port fT Pon i i~ Maximum Extension om Locating Shoulder. 2.31 in. Locating Shoulder 2.50 in. Port 3 pilot displacement .15 in.3 5000 psi maximum operating pressure. Area at Port 3 is i .8 ernes the area at Pori 1. Leakage rate less than 5 drops/min. Port 3 MSt sc*acement .30 in 3 5000 psj maxirrH/m ooeratmg pressure Area at Pon 3 i 8 ernes the area at Port i Leakage rate less man 5 drops'mm. I TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS an orifice, regardless of variations in upstream or downstream pressure. The orifice may be fixed or variable, including the variable orifice created by proportional type directional valves. Modulating cartridges can serve as mam stage pressure controls to handle high flows with a low flow pilot circuit to control the performance of the cartridge. This allows a great deal of flexibility in creating a variety of operating conditions during a machine cycle. Functions such as multiple control pressures and venting or deventing can be incorporated at appropriate points in the cycle, using small solenoid operated valves. Switching Cartridges SUN offers two basic logic switching cartridges: piictto-CDen (LK'C) and pilot-to-dose (LO'C). Pressure at port 1 or port 2, acting on areas A1 or A2, tends to open the valve. The bias spring force, togeth r with pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to close the valve. Depending on the direction ot flow, pilot-to-close switching valves open when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the force affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will open to either direction of flow when pressure at port 1 or port 2 is high enough to overcome the bias spring force. For example: Pressure required to open at port 1 50 psi Pressure required to open at port 2*65 psi When pilot pressure is applied at port 3. this pressure . acting on A3 (plus the bias spnng force), tends to hold the ave oosed The valve may then be opened by venting the pet pen ,'3i to tank, or by introducing a proportionately ".gtyr pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios >st*c asove it can be seen that: e-toi w-oo#* i Pvo*io-ao* Switching car.noges are unoaianced poppet, two-way vaives wth a third (pilot) port to control poppet operation Tne unoaianced poppet can De ooerated: A) directly by pressure at either work port B) by pilot pressure from an external source NOTE: Because of metr unoaianced ooooer design, the operation O' SUN s switching cartridges is pressure Dependent. The ooenmg and closing movements of the popoet are functions of the kxce oaiances on three areas - port 1. port 2. and port 3 NOTE: Because logic switching cartridges are pressure responsive at all three pons, it is essential to consider all aspects o' the system operation through a complete cycle when designing logic circuits. If pressure changes on any port are of Sufficient magnitude, they may cause a valve element to switch from a dosed to open condition, or vice versa. All possible pressure changes in the complete circuit cyde must be considered to assure a sale functional system design. Operation of LO'C Area Ratios Port 1 Area (Ai) . 100% Port 2 Area (A2) . 80% Port 3 Area (A3) - 180% Area Ratios XT -,fn X * 2 25 1 Pilot-to-Close Switching Cartridge LO'C i 8 i or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. ^ - 2 25 i or 1000 psi at port 3 will hold the valve closed against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Operation of LK'C Area Ratios Pan 1 Area lAij 100% on 2 Area (A2) - 80% Port 3 Area (A3) - 180% Area Ratios A3 Ai 1.8:1 A3 A2 2.25.1 DO A 134858 CONFIDENTIAL Switching Cartridge LK'C Pressure at port 1 or port 2. acting on areas Ai or A2, plus the bias spring force, tends to close the valve or add to the closing force. Pilot pressure at port 3, acting on area A3, tends to open the valve. Pilot-to-open switching cartridges close when the forces affecting the surface areas at port 1 or port 2 are greater than the forces affecting the surface area at port 3. When port 3 is vented, the valve will close and remain closed regardless of the pressure at port 1 or port 2. TECHNICAL TIPS LOGIC ELEMENTS When pilot pressure is applied at port 3, this pressure, acting on A3 (minus the bias spring force), tends to open the valve. The valve may be closed by venting port 3 (pilot) to tank, or by introducing a proportionately higher pressure at port 1 or port 2. From the area ratios listed above, it can be seen that: A3 = 1.8:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 1800 psi at port 1 with port 2 referenced to tank. A3 J2 * 2.25:1 or 1000 psi at port 3 will open the valve against pressures up to 2250 psi at port 2 with port 1 referenced to tank. Switching Elements as Directional Controls Four logic switching cartndges are required to duplcate the functions of a spool type four-way directional valve; one cartridge for each port - P, T, A, and B. By controlling the ooervng and closing of each element twelve different flow paths can be obtained. Using logic switching cartndges. a a possible to shift from one flow condition to any other without going through any intermediate (or "center") valve condition or function. Because the opening of the cartridges can be precisely controlled, the logic circuit can anticipate the requirements of the system, allowing flow to shift direction smoothly. By contrast, most spool type directional valves have only three operating positions and must always pass through a center condition when changing from one flow path to another. The opening order and shifting conditions are rigidly fixed by the spool configuration and overlap. Typical logic element four-way directional valve circuits, illustrating pilot-to-close and pilot-to-open cartndges are described below. NOTE Bom normally open and normally closed switching cannoges are seated popoet type valve designs, so leakage between pon t and pon 2 is essentially zero. Ail SUN switching cannoges are manufactured with seats on the pilot piston, eliminating any leakage between the pilot and work pons. Therefore, either woni pon can be selected as a source tor sei'-piioting without fear of loss of pressure from the pilot section of me worn pon Pon 3 must be tree of nr and full of oil before stamng up new systems 9.04 DO A 134859 CONFIDENTIAL Functional symbols / / l & 6 ^tr Solenoid directional controls Solenoid directional valves, two-way two-position (2/2), normally-closed series SV1/2/3/4-10(V)-C Modal and ordering code SV*-10(V)-C-*-"~ * m HJ OGZEI in iyp See also "Functional symbols" section 1 = Poppet type, two-stage, high flow 2 = Poppet type, two-stage, fast acting 3 - Poppet type, two-stage, free reverse flow 4 - Spool type, direct acting E Fluid compatibility Blank * Anttwear hydraulic oil V * As above or with phosphate-ester (not alkyl type) [3] Form 0 = Cartndge only In light-duty housing; 207 bar (3000 psi) max. 6T - With SAE 6 size pons In NFPA fatigue-rated housing; 207 bar (3000 psi) max. 6H = With SAE 6 size pons ContinuedKt next column 8H *= With SAE 8 size pons 2G = With G%"(BSPF) size ports 3G = With GW(BSPF) size ports (T| Voltaqe rating 00 = No coil 12D = 12V DC 24D - 24VDC 36D - 36V DC 24A 24VAC 60/50 Hz 115A - 115VAC 60 Hz/ 110VAC 50 Hz 230A 230VAC 60/50 Hz Amps 1,50 0.75 0,50 0.75 0,16 0.08 Lead olor -- Red Black Blue Orange Yellow Red/ White E Connector types Blank = No coil G ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) connector. Order requisite connector plug separately; see "Spare parts", two pages on. P - Vi'NPTconduit port, with leadwire O = Spade terminal (option for DC voltages only) W = Leadwire (option for DC and 24VAC only) Operating data Performance data is typical with fluid at 28 cSt (132 SUS) and 38C (100F) Max. pressure, both ports 207 bar (3000 psi) Rated flow: SV1 & SV3 models SV2&SV4 models 45l/min(12USgpm) 23 i/min (6 US gpm) Pressure drop characteristics Electrical characteristics and options See graphs on next page See 0 and (s] in "Model code" above, and also page 49 Hydraulic fluids, temperature ranges and filtration recommendations Installation dimensions, cartridge only See E in "Model code" and also page 266 See two pages on Cavity size Mass, cartridge including solenoid C-10-2 See page 247 for dimensions 0,4 kg (0.87 lb) approx. Housing options: Standard light duty type Standard fatigue-rated type Customized types Spare parts See page 255 See page 251 Consult your local sales engineer See two pages on DO A 134860 CONFTDFNTIAl 00 A 134861 OONFTDFNTTAL 07 Installati n dimensions in mm (inches) Solenoid directional controls 3rd angle projection rr^L 19 (0.75) A/F hex. Torque 5-6 Nm <4-6 Ibf ft) . ISO/OIN connector option shown; ' for oetails see 'Spare parts' m tatMe oe<ow Alternative solenoid connections shown on page 49 75 4 (l.Ol A/f hei Torque 4 7 54 fwn 05-40 tot ft) 5aO (0 67?i ti rb (0 670 Spare parts The only parts available are: a. Seal kits comprising external seals and back-up rings tor SV-10-C SV-10V-C b. Solenoid coil and ancillary parts C. ISO/DIN connector plug options: Black, marked B Gray, marked A Kit no SK-10-2 SK-10V-2 See page 49 Pan no 710775 710776 For dimensions see page 50 1 1 1 DO A 134862 CONFTDFNTTAl. Supporting products and information Supporting information Hydraulic fluids, temperature ranges, filtration recommendations and contaminant control Spare parts Repair and warranty Hydraulic fluids Usable with All valves with "V" immediately after the nominal size e.g. RV1 -10V-` relief valve FR2-16V-* flow control All vaJves with the "V" omitted e.g. RV1 -10-* relief valve FR2-16-* flow control Temperature ranges Viscosity/operating temperature envelopes Options Antiwear hydraulic oils or phosphate esters (not alkyl types) Antiwear hydraulic oils -20 to 38 65 82 *C t--I------------------- 1--------------------1---------------- 1.........I -4 SO 100 150 180 *F lhmperstufw For general information about the fluids see, for Antiwear hydraulic oils a) Data sheet about hydraulic fluids in industrial applications. Available on request and also in the main Vickers product catalog. b) Fluid suppliers' publications. Phosphate esters a) Fluid suppliers' publications. b) "Guidelines for the use of fire- resistant fluids in hydraulic systems" CETOP publication, available in English, German and French from CETOP members e.g. British Fluid Power Association, London, UK VDMA, Frankfurt/Main-Niederrad, W. Germany SCTHP, 16 Avenue Hoche, Paris, France. c) "Standard practice for use of fireresistant fluids in fluid power systems" ANSI, New York, USA. Filtration recommendations For consistent, efficient performance, filtration must maintain fluid cleanliness to ISO 4406:1986 class 16/13 or cleaner. This task is made easier by good system design, installation and maintenance practices as described below. Contaminant control Contaminant in hydraulic systems is now recognized as the most likely cause of any malfunction or failure of hydraulic equipment. Dependent on the nature, size and/or amount of contaminant it can cause: Machine malfunction, particularly when operating toward maximum capacity. Risk of frequent breakdowns under the same conditions. Production rates below schedule. High product scrap rates and quality faults. Nature of contaminant Contaminant can be either particle contaminant or the product(s) of fluid degradation. Particle contaminant cap be of metal, rubber, plastic, dirt, dust, fiber, sand, paint, etc.; several types may be present at any time. It can enter the fluid at any time after the fresh clean fluid has been shipped by the fluid manufacturer. There is usually little likelihood that fresh fluid became contaminated during the refining and blending processes. Continued on next page DO A 134863 CONFIDENT! Al Fluid d gradation shows in one or more of the following ways: Oxidation and/or th formation of gummy deposits and sludge from the combined effects of high temperatures, air, water and particle contaminant. These can increase viscosity, cause gummy deposits to coat moving parts, clog orifices and small passages, thus impairing smooth mechanical Supporting products and information movements, and form sludge. Unstable emulsions of poor lubricity formed when water accidently emulsifies with oil. These impair smooth movements and promote wear. Air bubbles in the fluid, particularly at low pressures. In excess, they cause noise in pumps and valves leading to erratic or spongy machine movements, premature wear and failure. Control of contaminant The table below prescribes preventive measures relative to the different common types and causes of contamination. For a more comprehensive treatise of the subject ask for the Vickers publication "Effective contamination control in fluid power systems". Preventive measures Solid contam. For storage barrels Store in cool, dry location. Ensure that bungs or plugs fully seal-in the fluid. Wipe away any dirt and moisture from around the bung or plug before loosening and emptying. O Use a portable filtration unit for emptying and re-filling. For storage tanks Install in cool, dry location. G Ensure that all covers and stop valves effectively seal-m the fluid. C Keep filling lines clean; cap ends when not in use. C Use a portable filtration unit for filling and emptying. For hydraulic systems G Provide fluid filterfs) in location(s) that ensure the requisite protection G The ideal steady-state flow conditions through an off-line filter makes this a "must" for most applications. G Whenever possible, use filters having element condition indicators. G Vented systems must be fitted with an air breather appropnate to the environment(s) in which the machine is to be operated and the requirements of the system. G Fit strainers to pump inlet lines if there is risk of gross contaminant (e.g. stnng. _ rag, screws, etc.) entering the lines. G Prevent air entenng the system, particularly through pump inlet lines. Ensure air-tight joints in any sub-atmospheric zone of pump inlet lines. Also ensure that those lines and all return and drain lines terminate below the minimum fluid level in the reservoir; pump inlet lines should be sufficiently below to prevent air entering through a vortex at low fluid levels. G Design for, and maintain, fluid temperatures at optimum levels for the application. Fit coolers if necessary. Locate or screen hydraulic systems away from high temperature sources e.g. furnaces. Assemble system in clean conditions and by using clean practices. D Pre-clean pipes and reservoir immediately before installation. Cap any ends that cannot immediately be connected to mating components e.g. between shifts. Remove protective caps only just before connecting mating components. O Use a portable filtration unit to fill the reservoir system. Flush new systems, and those that have undergone major repairs, before commissioning. Temporarily remove cylinders and semi-rotary motors and replace by bridging pipes. Servo valves and similar high precision units should also be replaced by bridging units for flushing operations. Ensure that cylinders and semi-rotary motors are clean internally before connecting to the system. Ensure that air breathers and reservoir covers are at all times properly installed and secured tightly. 0 Stop any leakage of water into the system from coolers or other sources. Make a leak-tight repair. By planned maintenance, ensure that fresh filter elements are fitted (or metallic elements cleaned when appropriate) when indicators or visual inspection shows this to be necessary. Take fluid samples periodically and examine to determine whether effects of particle contaminant, heat, water and air indicate need for more control of those factors orthe replacement of the fluid fill. Whenever the reservoir is emptied, clean it out thoroughly and remove all residual contaminant. If necessary, restore protective paint or otherfinishes. On completion, cap all openings unless the system isto be refilled immediately in which case ensure that air breathers, covers etc., are replaced. Fluid degradation by High Water Air temp. HO A 1,34864 CONFIDENTIAL CM^2c;36 - z * l INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ________________FOR 320 FRAME AND SMALLER MOTORS __________ WARNING These instructions must bs followed to ensure safe and proper installation, operation and maintenance of the motor. They should be brought to the attention of all persons who install, operate or maintain this equipment. Failure to follow instructions and safe electrical procedures could result in serious injury orfatality. Disconnect all power and discharge all capacitors before servicing. Install and ground per local and national codes. Consult qualified personnel with questions or if repairs are required. INSTALLATION UNCRATING AND INSPECTION After uncrating, check for any damage which may have been incurred in handling. The motor shaft should turn freely by hand. Repair or replace any loose or broken parts before attempting to use the motor. Check to be sure that motor has not been exposed to dirt, grit, or excessive moisture in shipment or storage before installation. Measure insulation resistance (see operation). Clean and dry the windings as required. Never start a motor which has been wet wrthout having it thoroughly dried. SAFETY Motors should be installed, protected and fused m accordance with latest issue of National Electrical Code, NEMA Standard Publication No. MG 2 and local codes Eyebolts or lifting lugs are intended for lifting the motor only. These lifting provisions should never be used when lifting or handling the motor with other equipment (i e pumps, gear boxes, fans or other dnven equipment) as a single unit. Be sure the eyebolt is fully threaded and l^ht m As mounting hole. Eyebolt lifting capacity rating is based on a lifting alignment coincident with the eyebott centerline Eyebolt capacity decreases as deviation from this alignment increases See NEMA MG 2. Frames and accessories of motors should be gfounded maccordance wh National Electncal Code (NEC) Article 430. For general information on grounding refer to NEC Article 250 Rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, unusual shaft sxtensions should be permanently guarded. Keep hands and clothing away from moving parts. Electrical repairs should be made by trained, qualified personnel only. LOCATION In selecting a location for the motor, consideration should be given to environment and ventilation. A motor with the proper enclosure for the expected operating condition should be selected. The ambient temperature of the air surrounding the motor should not exceed 40*C (104*F) unless the motor has been especially designed for high ambient temperature applestons. The free flow of air around the motor should not be obstructed The motor should never be placed in a room with a hazardous process, or where flammable gases or combustible material may be present, unless rt it specifically designed for this type of service. 1. Dnpproof (open) motors are intended for use indoors where atmosphere is relatively clean, dry and noncorrosive. 2. Totally enclosed motors may be installed where dirt, moisture and corrosion are present. 3. Totally enclosed severe duty motors are recommended for extreme environmental conditions. 4. Explosion proof motors are built for use in hazardous locations as indicated by Underwriters' label on motor. Consult UL, NEC, and local codes for guidance. FLOOR MOUNTING Motors should be provided with a firm, rigid foundation, with the plane of four mounting pads flat within .010* for 56 to 210 frame; .015* from 250 through 320 frame. This may be accomplished by shims under the motor feet. DO A 134865 CONFIDENTIAL. V-BELT DRIVE 1. Align sheaves carefully to avoid axial thrust on motor bearing. The drive sheave on the motor should be positioned toward the motor so it is as close as possible to the bearing. 2. When adjusting belt tension, make sure the motor is secured by all mounting bolts before tightening belts 3. Adjust belt tension to belt manufacturers recommendations. Excessive tension will decrease bearing life 4. Sheaves should be in accordance to NEMA Spec. MG-1 or as approved by the manufacturer for a specifk application. DIRECT CONNECTED DRIVE Flexbie or solid shaft couplings must be properly aligned for satisfactory operation. On flexible couplings, the clearance between the ends of the shafts should be in accordance with the coupling manufacturer': recommendations or NEMA standards for end play and limited travel in coupling. Misalignment between direct connected shafts will cause increased bearing loads and vibration even when the connection is made by means of a flexible coupling. Excessive misalignment will decrease bearing life. Propei alignment, per the specifications of the coupling being used, is critical. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 1. AD wiring, fusing, and grounding must comply with National Electrical Codes and local codes. 2. To determine proper rotation and voltage connections, refer to the information and diagram on the nameplate, separate connection plate or decal. If the plate or decal has been removed, contact the manufacturer for assistance. 3. Use the proper size of line current protection and motor controls as required by the National Electrical Code and local codes. Recommended use is 125% of full load amps as shown on the nameplate for motors with 40*C ambient and a service factor over 1.0. Recommended use is 115% of full load amps as shown on the nameplate for all other motors. Do not use protection with larger capacities than recommended. Three phase motors must have all three phases protected. Motor HP 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 Wire Stze For 115 A 230 Volt Single Phase Circuits Distance - Motor To Fuse or Meter Box - Feet 100 Ft. *00 ft 300 Ft 115V. #14 #12 #10 #10 #S 4 230V. #14 #14 #12 #12 #10 10 11SV. 10 10 a a e 0 230V. 12 12 10 10 a a 115V. a n a 4 4 230V. 10 #10 a a c a #4 a #a 4 6 4 #2 500 Ft 115V. 230V. #6 a 4 a 4 # #2 e 4 4 2 #2 #0 THERMAL PROTECTOR INFORMATION WARNING Disconnect power before working on motor driven equipment. Motors with automatic thermal protectors will automatically restart when the protector cools. Do not use motors with automatic thermal protectors in applications where automatic restart will be hazardous to personnel or equipment. Motors with manual thermal protectors may start unexpectedly after protectortrips. If manual protector trips, disconnect motor from power line. After protector cools (five minutes or more) it can be reset and power may be applied to motor. DO A 134866 OONFTDFNTX At. THERMAL PROTECTOR INFORMATION (Continued) The nameplate will indicate one of the following: 1. Motor is thermally protected 2. Motor is provided with overheat protective device For example: 1. Motors without thermal protection have nothing stamped on nameplate about thermal protection. 2. Motors equipped with built-in thermal protection have "THERMALLY PROTECTED* stamped on the nameplate. Thermal protectors open the motor circuit electrically when the motor overheats or is overloaded. The protector cannot be reset until the motor cools. If the protector is automatic, it will reset itself. If the protector is manual, press the red button to reset. 3. Motors that are provided with overheat protective device that does not open the motor circuit directly will indicate "WITH OVERHEAT PROTECTIVE DEVICE*. See motor connection diagram for details CHANGING ROTATION 1. Keep hands and clothing away from rotating parts. 2. Before the motor is coupled to the load, determine proper rotation. 3. Check rotation by jogging or bumping Apply power to the motor leads for a short period of time, enough to just get motor shaft to rotate a slight amount to observe shaft rotating direction. 4. Three phase interchange any two (2) of the tree# (3) tmt leads. Single phase reconnect perthe connection diagram on the motor. REOUCEO VOLTAGE STARTING Motors used on reduced voltage sunng eevB be carefw*y selected based upon power supply limitations and driven load requirements. The motors eianmg torque enl be reduced when using reduced voltage starting. The eiapeed time on the start step should be sept as shoe as possible and should not exceed 5 seconds. It is recommended that this time be fcmaed ? w~nnds Refer k> the manufacturer for application assistance. OPERATION BEFORE INITIAL STARTING 1 ff a mwo has become damp m trcrwt o' m storage measure the insulation resistance of the stator winomg Mrwwum Insulation Res* ansa . y * Ra*ed Vofiaoa In Megohms 1000 Do not toiemp* to run the motor if me ma>aarwr me am a below this value. Have the motor inspected, dned and/o' cleaned Contact a qualified motor **pa* shop 2 See the* vokage and frequency sia**c*d an kne and core ml nameplates correspond with that of the power 3 Checs as connectons to the motor end control man me wrong diagram. 4 Be Sum rotor luma freely when dacormactod horn the toad Any foreign matter in the air gap should be rnrowS 5 tfpoastoto wave I he motor disconnectodftom me toad forth# mitial start. It is desirable to operate the motor wither* toed tor about one hour to Md *to er*r tocahzed heating in bearings and windings. Check for proper rotatnn Check ky correct and balanced woAege to toe motor tarminals. Check no load amps. ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RANGE If voltage and frequency are wdhei me toaowmg range, motors will operate, but with somewhat different characteristic* than obtained w*h correct nameplate values. 1. Voltage. Within 10% above O' baton the value stamped on the nameplate. On three phase systems the voltage should be balanced w*hm 1% A emal tmliage unbalance will cause a significant current unbalance. 2. Frequency: Within 5% above or betow the value stamped on the nameplate. 3. Voltage and Frequency together Wafvn 10% (providing frequency above is less than 5%) above or below values stamped on the nameplate DO A 134867 CONFIDFNTIAL CLEANLINESS Keep both the interiorand exteriorof the motorfree from dirt, water, oil and grease. Motors operating in dirtyplaces should be periodically disassembled and thoroughly cleaned. CONDENSATION DRAIN PLUGS All explosion proof and some totally enclosed motors are equipped with automatic drain plugs, they should be free of oil, grease, paint, grit and dirt so they don't clog up. The drain system is designed for normal floor (feet down) mounting. For other mounting positions, modification of the drain system may be required, consult th manufacturer. LUBRICATION NOTE If lubrication instructions are shown on motor, they will supersede this general instruction.| Motors are property lubricated at the time of manufacture. It is not necessary to lubricaje at time of installation unless the motor has been in storage for a period of 12 months or longer. | SLEEVE BEARINGS: Reoil with 10 drops of 5W30 oil annually, after three years of normal service. PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED SEALED BALL BEARINGS: Require no attention during the life of the bearing. BALL BEARINGS: With provision for lubrication see below. 1. Stop motor. Disconnect power and lock out of service. * 2. Wipe clean all grease fittings (F4I and dram.) 3. Remove fill and drain plugs from the beenrig hub 4. Free dram hole of any hard grease (use piece of wire if necessary) 5. Add Grease using a low preside grease gun The amount and type of grease added is very important Tht, manufacturer's standard grease Chevron SRl 2 or equivalent Only enough greas should be added to replace the grease used by the beanng Too much grease can be as harmful as insufficient grease The greas* cavity should be filled 1/3 fo 1/? full 6 Stan motor and let run for appro*'metev 30 mmutes 7 Stop motor, woe off any Drained g*ee*e and replace fa#* and dram plugs 6 Motor ready for operation jprtrf (RPM) 1200 RPM or lass 1201 to 1800 RPM Over 1600 RPM RECOMMENDE D RELUBRICATION PERIOD Frame Stte Standard Conditions Severe Conditions 140-160 4 5 Years 16 Months 210-260 4 0 Years 16 Months 320 3 S Years 14 Months 140-160 3.0 Yearn 12 Months 210-260 2.5 Years 10 Months 320 2 0 Years 6 Months An 6 Months 3 Months i 1 Extreme Condition* 9 Months 6 Months 7 Months 6 Months 5 Months 4 Months 3 Months 1 Standard Conditions: Eight hours per day. normal O' light loading, clean 100* F maximum ambient Severe Conditions: Twenty-four hours per day operation, or shock loadings, vibration, or in dirt or dust, or at 100* to ISO* F ambient Extreme Conditions: Heavy shock or vibration, din. moisture, or dust at 100* to ISO* F ambient. FORM 3539 DO ft CONFlDfNtIftL CM PAVC Series * T- RECOMMENDED OPERATING AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS Speed Pressure Flow Inlet Conditions Filtration Temperature Range Fluid Control Drain -- Minimum 600 RPM -- Maximum 3000 RPM PAVC 33/38/65 -- Maximum 2600 RPM PAVC 100 -- Limited by the pressure compensator control in the pump -- Maximum allowable setting 3000 psi continuous -- Maximum allowable setting 3300 psi intermittent (20% duty) -- Minimum obtainable setting 400 psi -- PAVC 33 @ 1800 RPM -- 15 GPM -- PAVC 38 @ 1800 RPM -- 18 GPM -- PAVC 65 @ 1800 RPM -- 31 GPM -- PAVC 100 @ 1800 RPM -- 47 GPM -- Not to exceed 6" Hg vacuum at 1800 RPM on petroleum base fluids. -- Inlet pressure not to exceed 25 psi -- For maximum pump and system component life, fluid contamination should be limited to a level not to exceed 125 particles greater than 10 micron per milliliter of fluid (SAE Class 4 ISO 16/13). Due to the nature of variable volume pumps, pump inlet conditions, types of fluids and duty cycles must be considered before specifying suction filtration. Contact Parker representative for assistance. -- 50F to 160F -- Consult factory for other temperatures -- Premium quality hydraulic Oil with a viscosity between 150-250-SSU (30-50 cst) at 100'F (38*C) Normal operating vicsocity range between 80-1000 SSU (17-180 cst). Maximum stan-up viscosity is 4000 SSU (1000 cst). Oil Should have maxi mum anti-wear properties, rust and oxidation inhibitors. -- In full compensation ffi 1500 psi control dram flow should be less than 1.0 GPM -- Maximum allowable back pressure is 10 psi PAVC Series vent/fill PLUG LEFT HAND (CCW) ROTATION SHOWN MIRROR IMAGE FOR RIGHT HAND inlet PORT ---- HORSEPOWER (TOROUE) CONTROL ADJUSTMENT V i-- rr- \ w-- PRESSURE compensator ADJUSTMENT r SIGNAL PORT ("B" PORT) MAY BE USED AS GAGE PORT differential PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT SIGNAL PORT C'B" PORT) MAY BE USED AS GAGE port CONTROL DRAIN PORT) MUST BE CONNECTED ^ TANK) 00 A 134869 CONFIDENTIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1. When mounting the pump on a system where the fluid level is above the height of the pump (i.e. L-shaped or overhead reservoir) the pump case rfttttt be full of fluid before starling. This can be ac complished by loosening the vent/fill plug in the ^bmp case, opening the inlet line and allowing gravity to pre-fill the inlet line and pump case. When mounting the pump on a system where the fluid level Is below the pump (i.e. JIC reservoir) the following start-up procedure is recommended. Put approximately 2 cups of fluid in the pump case to lubricate parts during priming. Remove plug from airbleed drain port and connect an unrestricted line below minimum fluid level. Stan motor and run until pump primes or a maximum of 30 seconds. If pump doesn't prime in 30 seconds, stop motor (shaft not rotating) and repeat until pump primes. To insure that the pump remains in the primed condition through succeeding stan-ups, the pump should be mounted with the inlet porv in the upper position. 2. Do not apply side loads to the pump drive shaft. If side loading is necessary (Le. indirect drive), con sult factory. 3. Pump and motor shaft alignment must be-within .010 inch TIR using standard floating coupling (no end loading). An HML series pump motor adapter (available from Parker Pump Div.) and a Lovejoy AL110 coupling or equivalent may be used to maintain this level of alignment. 4. The PAVC series of pumps are uni-directional and must be driven in the direction indicated by the arrow on the side of the front housing. 5. Check all inlet connections to be suro they are air-tight. An air leak in the inlet line can cause the pump case to drain down and cause .he pump to loose prime during succeeding stan-ups. 6 Pori "A" is the control dram and must be connected directly to tank. This line should not be combined with other drain or tank lines as back pressure surges could occur, causing compensator instability. "A" port back pressure is limited to 10 put. 7. Port "6" is a feedback pilot line (signal port) There are two "B" pons on the pump: either may be used for a signal line. The spare port can function as a gage port. 8 The pressure compensator is factory set and can be lowered for start-up. CW rotation increases the compensator setting. COW rotation decreases this setting Pump compensator should be set with the system deadheaded. 9 Differential pressure adjustment and Horsepower control adjustment are factory set -- readjustment is not recommended, consult factory. 10. Pump does not have or require a case drain. 11. Airbleed is standard on all PAVC Pumps. When required, remove airbleed drain plug (7/16-20 SAE-4) and connect unrestricted to tank below minimum oil level. PORT SIZES MODEL INLET STRAIGHT THREAD SAE FLANGE PAVC 33 1 Vi-12 (-20) PAVC 38 PAVC 65 1V4-12 (-20) 17,-12 (-24) PAVC 100 ( ) SAE Fitting Size IV,* 1V4* 1W 2* OUTLET STRAIGHT THREAD V/,,-12 (-12) 1%r12 (-12) 1*/,,-12 (-16) 1%-12 (-20) SAE FLANGE f IV," CONTROL DRAIN "A" PORT STRAIGHT THREAD y,-20 (-4) 7i-20 (-4) */t-18 (-6) Vie-IB (-6) SIGNAL PORT "B" PORT STRAIGHT THREAD Vi*-20 (-4) Vi-20 (-4) Vi-20 (-4) 7i*-20 (-1) Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluidpower Pump Division 100 Parker Drive Otsego, Ml 49078 Phone (616) 692-6411 Telex 22-3^ Printed in U.S.A. Fluidpower 786479 DO A 1.34870 CONFIDENTIAL Introduction Variable Volume Piston Pumps Series PAVC 33/38/65/100 G neral Description All control is achieved by the proper positioning of the swash plate. This is achieved by a servo piston acting on one end of the swash plate working against the combined effect of the off-setting forces of the pistons and centering spring on the other end. The control spool acts as a metering valve which varies the pressure behind the servo piston. As shown in Figure 1, the amount of flow produced by the Parker Piston Pump is dependent upon the length of stroke of the pumping pistons. This length of stroke, in turn, is determined by the position of the swash plate. Maximum flow is achieved at an angle of 17. The rotating piston barrel, driven by the prime mover, moves the pistons in a circular path and the piston slippers are supported hydrostatically against the face of the swash plate. When the swash plate is in a vertical position, perpendicular to the centerline of the piston barrel, there is no piston stroke and consequently no fluid displacement. When the swash plate is positioned at an angle, the pistons are forced in and out of the barrel and fluid displacement takes place. The greater the angle of the swash plate, the greater the piston stroke. The centerline of the pumping piston assembly is offset from the centerline of the swash plate. Therefore, as shown on the accompanying Figure 1A, the pistons' effective summation force tends to destroke the swash plate to a vertical (neutral) position. This destroking force is balanced as the swash plate is angled by the force of the servo piston ROTATING piston BARREL a FIGURE 1. Pumping Action Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluidpower Pump Division Otsego, Ml 49078 26 FIGURE 1A. sm FluirinowpH' DO A 104871 CONFIDENTIAL Introduction c rwiumc noiuu ruiiifia. Series PAVC 33/38/65/100 Pressure Comp nsated Control Swash plate angle controls the output flow of the pump. Swash plate angle is controlled by the force generated against the swash plate by the pumping pistons and by the force of the servo piston. The force of the servo piston is greater than the force of the pumping pistons when both are at the same pressure. By means of internal porting, pressure is connected from the output port to the servo piston via orifice (E), and to the control spool via passage (0). Also pressure is applied to the control spool chamber thru orifice (F). As long as the pressures at both ends of the control spool remain equal, the spool will remain offset to the right, due to the added force of the spring. When pressure reaches the setting of the compensator control, the dart leaves its seat causing the pressure in the spool chamber to be reduced. The spool now moves downward causing pressure in the servo piston cavt* to vent via port "A" The reduced pressure at the se'vc p>ston allows the servo piston to move to the ngn: movement reduces the angle of the swash piate a^c thereDy reduces the pumps output flow As Pump pressure on the control spool drops be Ow pressure and spring force <n me spool cnamDe* mp cont'o spool moves upwa'd to maintain an eau- r* 0- bom sides o? the sooo i* pump pressure ta s :** .* compensator cont'Oi ser og me control spoo< mowb* ng ng me pump to ma mum displacement AP Adjustment Of PAVC Pumps PROCEDURE: a. Standard Pressure Compensated Pump Pumps are shipped from factory with a differential pressure of 150 PSI (10 Bar) on PAVC 33/38/65, FAVC 100 is 300 PSI (21 Bar) at 50% of maximum swash angle. Differential pressure will not normally change through the life of the pump. If this control has been tampered with, a close approximation of the correct setting can be made as follows: Dead head the pump (no flow) with a 0-3000 PSI (0-207 Bar) gauge in the OUTLET (not the low signal "B" port), back the pressure control out (full counterclockwise). The gauge should read between [PAVC 33 300-325 PSI (21-22 Bar), PAVC 38 375-400 PSI (26-28 Bar). PAVC 65 400-425 PSI (28-29 Bar). PAVC 100 550-600 PSI (38-42 Bar)] If the gauge reads above this, turn the differential adjustment knob counterclockwise until correct PSl figure e reached Control Option - `Omit' Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluldp wer Pump Division Ots go. Ml 49078 27 Fluidpower DO A 13487? CONFIDENTIAL Installation Informati n Variable Volume Piston Pumps Series PVP and PAVC Use Of A R lief Valve The use of a relief valve, while not manadatory is re commended in the main circuit to suppress hydraulic shock loads and as additional system protection. If a minimum volume stop is used, the use of a relief valve is mandatory. Fluid Recommendations Premium quality hydraulic oil with a viscosity range between 150-250 SSU (30-50 cst.) at 100F. (38C.). Normal operating viscosity range between 80-1000 SSU (17-180 cst.). Maximum start-up viscosity is 4000 SSU (1000 cst.). NOTE: Consult Parker when exceeding 160F (71 0C) operation Oil should have maximum anti-wear pro perties. rust and oxidation treatment Filtration Fpr maximum pump and system component life the system snouid be protected from contamination at a leve: not to exceed 125 particles greater than io microns per milliliter of fluid (SAE Class 4/ISO 16/13) Due to me nature of variable diSDiacement pumps variations in pump inlet cona tions fluid acceleration tosses system aeration ano outy cycle we do no: recommend Suction line titters Contact your Parxe' representative to- assistance Start-Up O'" in-tia stan-up me case sno^c be Mied with o* p'essjre snouid be reduced anc me o'cu>: snouic oe open q- rne a'* died from me pjmc oune: to permit pnming See installation and Mount,ng Section to con nec* ai'D*eec inlet Conditions No: to exceed 5 mcnes Hg Vacuum at 1800 RPM on pet'o-eum base fluids See recommenaea speed spec t'um to' specific miet conditions Shaft Rotation and Line Up Pump ano motor shaft alignment must be wrthm 010 TIP maximum, using a standard floating coupling Please toOw coupling manufacturer s recommenaea msta'ia lion instructions to prevent end thrust on pump shaft Turn pump to assure freedom of rotation Pump and motor must be on a rigid base. The coupling should be sized to absorb the peak horsepower developed Installation and Mounting Wher- mounting 3 PVP Senes Pump, the ' case dram" must be on too of the pump The ' case dram" should be a separate ime unrestricted to the reservoir and e*ienc Deo*, the o' level as tar from ihe inlet line as per,s be The case dram" ime must not exceed 10 PSl ' 69 Bar backpressure Suggested maximum line *rogm is 1C feet Whe-- a pavC Senes Pump is mounted above the fluid eve tne pos^on ot the control dram' is not restricted Du* tne miet port must not be on the bottom The contro a-am should be a separate Ime unrestricted t: tne rese-vb* ano extend below the oil level as tar 'o'- tne m.et ime as possible The control dram" line must no* exceed 10 PSi (69 Bar) back pressure Sug gested maximum ime length is 10 feet a bui't m ai'tyeed ts standard on all PAVC 33, 38, 65 and 100 Pumps To connect, remove airbleed drain pjg and connect a line unrestricted to reservoir ex tending De<ow minimum oil level Back pressure in this nne must not exceed 4 PSl (.28 Bar) Special Installations Consult your Parker representative for any application requiring tne following Pressure aOove rated, drive speed above maximum, indirect drive, fluid other than petroleum oil, oil temperature above 160F (7iC) Inlet Pressure Not to exceed 10 PSl C 69 Bar) on PVP 16, 23/33. Not toexceed 25 PSl (1.72 Bar)on PAVC 33,38,65,100 Park r Hannifin Corporation Fluidpower Pump Division Otsego, Ml 49078 ,34873 rVlOFNTIM Fluidpower Installation Inf rmation Variable Volume Piston Pumps Series PAVC 33, 38, 65, 100 ! '\j TRUNNION CAP ASSY. thrust waShER SNAP RING ORING -- | TRUNNION CAP----i ROLLER BEARING ; (2) SLEEVE ASSY. ! (4) RETAINER DETAIL 'TJ AIR BLEED ASSY. cII ~ ROUNDED EDGE BODY SPRING BALL -- L STAKE BALL in place <D BEARING SHAFT ASSY. 'jp ADJUSTING STEM ASSY. plug 1 ,LEEv,'m ms ms ms O-RING LL) BACK-UP RING 0 (D PLUG ASSY. NOTE POSITION OF ROUNDED EDGE ON SNAP RING PISTON-DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL O-RING 0 BACK-UP RING 0 (D PORT PLATE LEFT hand iccwi port plate SHOWN IN ASSEMBLY (ABOVE! RIGHT HAND (CW) PORT PLATE SHOWN BELOW. PISTON BODV ----' O-RING Q] 0 BACK-UP RING [Tj QD PISTON BODV--------O-RING 0 BACK-UP RING 0 HI n '--* ^^ Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluidpower Pump Division Otsego, Ml 49078 DO A 104874 OONFTDFNTTA! Fluidpower Installation Information \ 12FT..LBS TOROUE 50 FT.-LBS. TORQUE variaoie vuiume risiun rumps Series PAVC 33,38,65,100 I BO FT LBS TOROUE REO'D SHOWN (FIXED ALSO AVAILABLE ) PISTON ASSEMBLY - TORQUE (HP) CONTROL (See next page) -- VOLUME SERVO FEEDBACK (See next page) Parker Hannifin Corporation Fluidpow r Pump Division Otsego, Ml 49078 PAVC 33 38 65 GOTaorot 0M(* 4 t H It mc SC AM CM MM 0*EN *07 X 1 102 X 1 OPEN IOOSM 102 X 1 OOS99 102 X 1 102X1 102X1 00599 PAVC 100 cotfinacm* OMIT A c H M ME S SE AM CM HM OPEN 102 X 1 102 X 1 OPEN 690670 102 X 1 690670 102 X 1 102 X 1 102 X 1 690670 POSITION 600599 00599 00599 900599 OPEN 800599 OPEN 00599 00599 00599 OPEN 106X4 OPEN OPEN 106X4 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 766635 786635 OPEN POSITION 690670 690670 690670 690670 OPEN 690670 OPEN 690870 690670 690670 OPEN 106X4 OPEN OPEN 106X4 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 796635 786635 OPEN 106X4 106 X4 106X4 106X4 109X4 106X4 106X4 106X4 OPEN OPEN 106X4 108X4 106X4 106X4 106X4 109X4 106X4 106X4 106X4 OPEN OPEN 106X4 OMIT 767474 767474 OMfT OMIT 787474 Omit OMIT 767474 767474 OMIT OMrT 797474 787474 OMrT OMIT 787474 OMIT OMIT 787474 767474 OMIT DO A 134875 CONFIDENTIAL Fluidpower Ordering Informati n Variable Volume Piston Pumps Series PAVC 65 PAVC 65 Pump TDisplacement PC Bearing Shaft Outlet Inlet Differential Volume Control Seals Design Flange Kit K'* mckXKi Bor* Via O-Rmg These A/e 4-Bok Sa Sty* Fudges See tectn page 56 Weight and Package Size Model PAVC 65 Weight In Pounds 50 Length From Mounting Face In Inches (CM) 8.82 (22.4) Height in Inches (CM) 7.42 (18 B) Width In Inches (CM) 8.00 (20.3) Parker Hannifin Corporation Fiuidpower Pump Division Otsego, Ml 49078 46 accessories tor S ft SE Options PPC valve 694586 Amp Single Pump AP11 Amp Double Pump AP211 Seq Valve (40 GPM Max.) SX6P(SX6VH Seq, Valve <90 GPM Max.) SX10P/SX10M(-) Ordering Notes: Unless otherwise specified, pump ts shipped at maxi mum GPM (1000 RPM) end set to 1000 RSI (69 Bar). When factory sellings ere re paired. the items shown tn Chen #1 must oe included with order Chart *1 Item RPM PSI H.P. GPM DO A 13487B CONFIDFNTIAI Fli lirlnmnor Flexible Drive Couplings by Magnaloy Ct~ Magnaloy is the original lightweight, heavy-duty flexible drive coupling. Light weight magnesium construction makes Magnaloy couplings 76% lighter than cast iron and 36% lighter than aluminum units. . .and they 're stronger than either! The benefits are many. . .Reduced loads on bearings, shafts and pumps, for longer component life. Easier handling and installation. Rust proof and corrosion resistant. Magnaloy's close machining tolerances (TIR of .002") assures vibration - free operation and easy, accurate alignment without need for special tools. Solid magnesium alloy sand castings are heat treated and offer the highest strenglh-to-weight ratio available. The damp-type coupling utilizes the basic Magnaloy coupling with the addition of the damp feature. Developed to compensate for variations in spline formation methods and tolerances. Assures centering of the coupling and positive retention on the shaft. The clamp feature is suggested for all spline couplings, but is also available in smooth bored and keyed models. _. Coupling Porformnnco Cnprmc.dh ur: Modal rMax 'Size * 'Bore 100 1-1 8 200 1-3 6 3oo 1-!i8 400 1-7 8 SOO 2 38 2 *.8 7l*i ;* / h 8'XJ ;i 7 1 <oo ! 4 *4 Rated Wr* Insert Torque lb/tf* Number lb-in .0046 170N 170U 170H 340 7 511.0 1.022 1 0068 270N 270U 270H 398.3 597 4 1,194 9 02? 370N 370U 370H 701 4 1 052 1 2 104 2 031 470N 1.056 3 470U 470H 1.5M4 5 3 Kj8 9 071 570N 1 2 194 8 570U 570H 3 292 2 (, *>H4 4 16 G70N 4 *ui, r b70U 7 4;*o t (7011 14 H4f> l .`U 7/ON 1 1 . 1* ft 7/i ill i; 4vt ,* 9b k'on ' 1 HH' 4 i 870U 3;' K (4 1 4 20 970N 47 H4.' 1 070U 71 7i 1 * Torsional Rigidity Ib-in/Deg 42 53 182 55 66 234 81 14B 336 136 310 488 314 695 1 571 (.70 i sin ; `HiO 1 MO' : io-i 1jHi \ h 4?e Horse Power Rating(u 100 rpm 1200 rpm 1800 rpm .55 62 1 65 66 98 iy h 98 14 7 29 7 64 96 1 92 1 1? 1 66 3 36 76 11 fi ?\o 1\ .11 / 4* 4 11 5 172 34 5 ?n .>.) idi 6 1 69 25 51 `< .vi 4 III' 6 IO 4 4% 6 Ml 3 35 53 in 41 (. .* 1.1. 4 . 1 . Ml H 1*'i . 79 11 9 2.1 7 ini. ` * ,* *1 f 52 5 *4 14 1 11 4 6>* 4 14 * *. .*1 1 * 4 `'4 1 1-. n t< i M4`, 1, 71,5 1 14 H MIN . 1 1 * * 1 1'M tiplinn iSnuphu . n::\ Spline Slit Number of Teeth Pitch Pressure Angle Degrees SAE Design Major Diameter (inches) Std. Coupling Available Model Sues 9 16 32 30 A.AA 635 13 86 30 D.E 1 750 13 16 32 30 B 875 14 12 24 30 C 1 250 15 8 16 30 F 2 000 15 16 32 30 BB 1 00 21 16 32 30 1.375 23 16 32 30 1.500 27 16 32 30 1 750 40 16 32 30' 2 5625 too-you 400-900 100-900 200-900 500-900 100-900 300-900 300-900 400-900 600-900 Sieel Bushed Coupling Available Model Sizes 200-900 600-900 300-900 500-900 800-900 400-900 500-900 500-900 600-900 800-900 Magnnloy Coupling Oimrn:i, <n- Model . Size v 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 A 2.54 3.10 3.58 4.24 4.67 5.98 6.99 7.99 10 15 B 2.600 2.900 3450 4.000 4.800 5.975 6.900 8.600 11.400 c 2.00 2.25 2.90 3.05 4 00 4.50 5.19 7.00 8.30 DO A 134877 CONFIDENTIAL installation instructions V<,/, U'-liiL.ti: .iii. ijr-f-'.!' 'iv-: a;ij>i(.-jS-'iyrs, 'yy/ '}'"({ ' ^ 'ii: i" U. :'. -.;cn O' - ' :!SSl.<5 ''tXfS&i1-vjl- sftKei tiiiiMf r (i:. . ' .jii)ic>f'` .0iTg3_f'<=iiXit=^;L=a*rT=yilV' zy' ^tx--.{, > :/% :HU : ' ' ' ; D0 A 134878 CONFIDENTIAL Magnaloy couplings offer four-way flexibility (parallel, angular, axial and torsional) and require no lubrication. They are easily installed and properly aligned without use of special tools or equipment - a straight edge and hex wrench are the only tools required. Magnaloy's in sert reduces noise and vibration and permits needed flexibility for proper operation within alignment capabilities. MODEL 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 1900 ^ SET SCREW 60-70 in. lbs. 130- 140 m lbs. 130- 140 in. lbs. 190-200 m lbs 190 200 in. lbs. 190 200 in. lbs. 300-310 in. IbS 300 *310 in. lbs. 100-110 ft. lbs. CLAMP SCREW 130- 140 m. lbs. 130 -140 in lbs 210 -220 in. lbs 210-220 in. IbS 300-310 in. lbs. 35-36 ft. lbs. 35-36 ft. lbs. 49-50 ft. lbs. 100- 110 ft. lbs. 1 fs li'^* , * '*;*'i\t?iCifef`ii)Wif/ir.- " jv ' * rijJ?'f*iP!.5;1 jf? C; ( v?v7/C*Xv,^: t3`-V-.t1; T>r . ": . , ; -s ' . -Vsiii 1 i-'-iv fi|t*1 (L - iVs(?)|=^!(!"(: . :.ej' f '. y 4 Maximum Angular Misalignment 11 Maximum Parallel Misalignment .015 in. DO A 134879 CONFIDENTIAL INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ________________ FOR 320 FRAME AND SMALLER MOTORS ___________ WARNING These instructions must be followed to ensure safe and proper installation, operation and maintenance of the motor. They should be brought to the attention of all persons who install, operate or maintain this equipment. Failure to follow instructions and safe electrical procedures could result in serious injuryorfatality. Disconnect all power and discharge all capacitors before servicing. Install and ground per local and national codes. Consult qualified personnel with questions or if repairs are required. INSTALLATION UNCRATING AND INSPECTION j After uncrating, check for any damage which may have been incurred in handling. The motor shaft should turn freely by hand. Repair or replace any loose or broken parts before attempting to use the motor. Checkto be sure that motor has not been exposed to dirt, grit, or excessive moisture in shipment or storage before installation. Measure insulation resistance (see operation). Clean and dry the windings as required. Never start a motor which has been wet without having it thoroughly dried. SAFETY Motors should be installed, protected and fused m accordance with latest issue of National Electrical Code. NEMA Standard Publication No. MG 2 and local codes. Eyebolts or lifting lugs are intended for lifting the motor only. These lifting provisions should never be used when lifting or handling the motor with other equipment (i.e. pumps, gear boxes, fans or other dnven equipment) as ^ a single unit. Be sure the eyebolt is fully threaded and tight in rts mounting hole. Eyebolt lifting capacity rating is based on a lifting alignment coincident with the eyebolt centerline. Eyebolt capacity decreases as deviation from this alignment increases. See NEMA MG 2. Framesand accessories of motors should be grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 430. For general information on grounding reler to NEC Ande 250. j Rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, unusual shaft extensions should be permanently guarded. Keep hands and clothing awaytrom moving parts. Electncal repairs should be made by trained, qualified personnel only. LOCATION In selecting a location for the motor, consideration should be given to environment and ventilation. A motor with the proper enclosure for the expected operating condition should be selected. The ambient temperature of the air surrounding the motor should not exceed 40*C (104*F) unless the motor has been especially designed for high ambient temperature applcations. The free flow of air around the motor should not be obstructed. The motor should never be placed in a room with a hazardous process, or where flammable gases or combustible material may be present, unless it it specifically designed for this type of service. 1. Dripproof (open) motors are intended for use indoors where atmosphere is relatively clean, dry and noncorrosive. 2. Totally enclosed motors may be installed where dirt, moisture and corrosion are present. 3. Totally enclosed - severe duty motors are recommended for extreme environmental conditions. 4. Explosion proof motors are built for use in hazardous locations as indicated by Underwriters' label on motor. Consult UL, NEC, and local codes for guidance. FLOOR MOUNTING Motors should be provided with a firm, rigid foundation, with the plane of four mounting pads flat within .010* for 56 to 210 frame; .015* from 250 through 320 frame. This may be accomplished by shims under the motor feet. DO A 134880 CONFIDENTIAL V-BELT DRIVE 1. Align sheaves carefully to avoid axial thrust on motor bearing. The drive sheave on the motor should be positioned toward the motor so it is as close as possible to the bearing. 2. When adjusting belt tension, make sure the motor is secured by all mounting bolts before tightening belts. 3. Adjust belt tension to belt manufacturers recommendations. Excessive tension wilt decrease bearing life. 4. Sheaves should be in accordance to NEMA Spec. MG-1 or as approved by the manufacturer for a specific application. DIRECT CONNECTED DRIVE Flextole or solid shaft couplings must be properly aligned for satisfactory operation. On flexible couplings, the clearance between the ends of the shafts should be in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations or NEMA standards for end play and limited travel in coupling. Misalignment between direct connected shafts will cause increased bearing loads and vibration even when the connection is made by means of a flexible coupling. Excessive misalignment will decrease bearing life. Proper alignment, per the specifications of the coupling being used, is critical. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 1. All wiring, fusing, and grounding must comply with National Electrical Codes and local codes. 2. To determine proper rotation and voltage connections, refer to the information and diagram on the nameplate, separate connection plate or decal. If the plate or decal has been removed, contact the manufacturer for assistance. 3. Use the proper size of line current protecton and motor controls as required by the National Electrical Code and local codes. Recommended use m 125% of full load amps as shown on the nameplate for motors with 40*C ambient and a service lector over i 0 Recommended use is 115% of full load amps as shown on the nameplate for all other motors Do not use protection with larger capacities than recommended. Three phase motors must have all three phase# protected Motor HP 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 S WV* Size For 111 A 230 Volt Single Phase Circuits Distance Motor To Fuse or Meter Box - Feet 100 Ft i 200 n. 300 Ft, nsv. 230V 111V 1 230V. 115V. 230V. 14 14 *10 1 *12 1 10 12 14 i *10 i *12 e 10 10 110 12 0 *10 4 1 4 6 4 10 0 6 1 i t 4 4 1 4 2 500 FL 11SV. 230V. *6 s 4 s #4 6 *2 6 4 4 2 2 0 THERMAL PROTECTOR INFORMATION WARNING Disconnect power before workmg on motor dnven equipment. Motors with automatic thermal protectors will automatically restart when the protector cools Do not use motors with automatic thermal protectors in applications where automate restart will be hazardous to personnel or equipment. Motors with manual thermal protectors may start unexpectedly after protectortrips. If manual protectortrips. disconnect motor from power bne. After protector cools (five minutes or more) it can be reset and power may be applied to motor. DO A 134881 CONFIDENTIAL THERMAL PROTECTOR INFORMATION (C ntinued) The nameplate win indicate one of the following: 1. Motorthermally protected 2. Motor is provided with overheat protective device For example: 1. Motors without thermal protection have nothing stamped on nameplate about thermal protection. 2. Motors equipped with built-in thermal protection have THERMALLY PROTECTED" stamped on the nameplate. Thermal protectors open the motor circuit electrically when the motoroverheats or is overloaded. The protector cannot be reset until the motor cools. If the protector is automatic, it will reset itself. If the protector is manual, press the red button to reset. 3. Motors that are provided with overheat protective device that does not open the motor circuit directly will indicate "WITH OVERHEAT PROTECTIVE DEVICE". See motor connection diagram for details CHANGING ROTATION 1. Keep hands and clothing away from rotating parts. 2. Before the motor is coupled to the load, determine proper rotation. 3. Check rotation by jogging or bumping. Apply power to the motor leads for a short period of time, enough to just get motor shaft to rotate a slight amount to observe shaft rotating direction. 4. Three phase interchange any two (2) of the three Q) line leads. Single phase reconnect perthe connection diagram on the motor. REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING Motors used on reduced voltage startmg would be carefully selected based upon power supply limitations and driven load requirements The motors sunmg torque enl be reduced when using reduced voltage starting. The elapsed time on the start step thouid be kept as short as possfete and should not sxceed 5 seconds. It * recommenced the! this time be fcmsed id 2 seronos Refer to the manufacturer for application assistance. OPERATION BEFORE INHIAL STARTING 1. If a motor hat become damp m tnowen or m storage measure the insulation resistance of the stator wmomg Mmuru-m insulation Restores . , . Rated Vottaae in Megohms 1000 Do no> anempr to run the motor d the meutetpn res stance below trus value. Have the motor inspectad. dned andmr cleaned Contact a qualified motor <eoev shoo 2 See that vodage and frequency stamped o* motor and corSroi nameplates correspond with that of the power toe 3. Chocs e* connections to the motor and corpof smh the wmng diagram. 4. Be sure rotor turns freely when opconnected from the load Any foreign matter in the air gap should be removed S H poestte. leave the motor disconnected fmm the toed lor the initial start. It ts desirable to operate the motor without toed tor about one hour to tap tar any loeakied heating at beanngs and windings. Check for proper rotation Check tor correct and balanced vodage at the motor terminals. Check no load amps. ALLOWABLE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RANGE If votlsge and frequency are tmthm the toSowng range, motors will operate, but with somewhat different characteristics than obtained with correct nameplate values. 1. Voltage: Within 10% above v below the value stamped on the nameplate. On three phase systems the voltage should be balanced wtthm 1% A smal voltage unbalance will cause a significant current unbalance. 2. Frequency. Within 5% above or below the value stamped on the nameplate. 3. Voltage and Frequency together Wdtvn 10% (providing frequency above is less than 5%) above or below values stamped on the nameplate DO A ^3488? C0NFTDFNTTAL CLEANLINESS Keep both tha interior and exterior oftha motorfraa from dirt, watar, oil and grease. Motor* operating in dirty places should be periodically disassembled and thoroughly cleaned. CONDENSATION DRAIN PLUGS All explosion proof and soma totally enclosed motors are equipped with automatic drain plugs, they should be free of oil, grease, paint, grit and dirt so they don't clog up. the drain system is designed for normal floor (feet down) mounting. For other mounting positions, modification of the drain system may be required, consult the manufacturer. LUBRICATION NOTE If lubrication instructions are shown on motor, they will supersede this general instruction._______ Motors are properly lubricated at the time of manufacture. It is not necessary to lubricate at time of installation unless the motor has been in storage for a period of 12 months or longer. SLEEVE BEARINGS: Reoil with 10 drops of 5W30 oil annually, after three years of normal service. PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED SEALED BALL BEARINGS: Require no attention during the life of the bearing. BALL BEARINGS: With provision for lubrication - see below. 1. Stop motor. Disconnect power and lock out of service. 2. Wipe clean all grease fittings. (Fill and drain.) 3. Remove fill and drain plugs from the bearing hub. 4. Free drain hole of any hard grease (use piece of wire if necessary). 5. Add Grease using a low pressure grease gun. The amount and type of grease added is very important. The manufacturer's standard grease is Chevron SRI 2 or equivalent. Only enough grease should be added to replace the grease used by the beanng. Too much grease can be as harmful as insufficient grease. The grease cavity should be filled 1/3 to 1/2 full. 6. Start motor and let run for approximately 30 minutes. 7. Stop motor, wipe off any drained grease, and replace filler and dram plugs. 8. Motor is ready for operation. Speed (RPM) 1200 RPM or less 1201 to 1800 RPM Over 1800 RPM RECOMMENDE D RELUBRICATION PERIOD Frame Standard Severe Size Conditions Conditions 140-180 210-280 320 4.5 Years 4.0 Years 3.5 Years 18 Months 16 Months 14 Months 140-180 210-280 320 3.0 Years 2.5 Years 2.0 Years 12 Months 10 Months 9 Months All 6 Months 3 Months Extreme Conditions 9 Months 6 Months 7 Months 6 Months 5 Months 4 Months 3 Months Standard Conditions: Eight hours per day, normal or light loading, clean 100* F maximum ambient. Severe Conditions: Twenty-four hours per day operation, or shock loadings, vibration, or in dirt or dust, or at 100* to ISO* F ambient. Extreme Conditions: Heavy shock or vibration, dirt, moisture, or dust at 100* to 150* F ambient. FORM 3539 DO A 134883 CONFIDENTIAL r VIKING PUMP TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL ^SECTION -iTSM320.2 i sU.r'&xyr-.' which is offset in the pump head, should be properly posi tioned toward and equal distance between the port con nections to allow for proper flow of liquid through the pump. If it is necessary to disassemble the pump for inspection or repair, first remove the head capscrews and remove the head by tapping the head removing lugs lightly. CAUTION: WHEN THE HEAD IS BEING REMOVED, THE IDLER USUALLY STAYS ON THE IDLER PIN. AVOID TILTING THE INSIDE OF THE HEAD DOU N- WARD. AS THE IDLER MAY SLIDE OFT THE IDLER PIN AND FALL. A FALL ON A HARD SURFACE CAN DAMAGE THE IDLER. IF THE IDLER SHOULD FAI L. CHECK CAREFULLY AND FILE OR STONE ALI NICKED OR ROUGH PLACES BEFORE RE-ASSEMBLt. 3 REMOVE THE HEAD CASKETS. If a new set is n, tillable, the original gaskets mas be reused prosided tfto re not damaged. 4 RE WOVE THE IDLEft fPOU THE IDLER PIS I' v idler pin is worn, both the head and idler pin and hushing should be replied II the idler bushing is worn, a new bushing is needed ( I! the new bushing is carbon graphite, special care mut- <v taken when pressing it into the idler. An arbor p-esshould alwavs be used, be sure the bushing is started straight DO NOT STOP the pressing operation urn,, bushing is in its proper Uvation Carbon graphite i* b-u tie. starting and stopping the pressing operation freguem Is results in a cracked bushing If cracked in the idler, mr bushing will quickls disintegrate FIGURE 4 VIEW OF FLANGE ENO OF G AND GG475 MECH. SEAL PUMPS .' REMOVE THE ROTOR FROM THE CASING The tor of the two smaller pumps (G and GG sices) can be re mosed by pressing on the hollow drive end of the rotor it will be necessary on the models with mechanical seals <G4"5 and GG475) to use an arbor press and an arbsr ot approximately 1-3/8`diameter The teal will remain m the casing. The rotor of the three larger sire pumps (H. HJ. HL st/esi can also be removed by pushing on the hollow drive end of the rotor. The spring and rotary member of the mechani cal seal will come out with the rotor in these pumps 6. REMOVE THE MECHANICAL SEAL OR LIP SEALS (See Figure 4.) Remove the snap ring in the casing of the two smaller pumps (G and GG sizes) and the complete seal can be removed out of the large flanged end of the casing. In the case of the G & GG size lip seal pumps these have no snap rings and the lip seals can be removed out the large flanged end of the casing. Remove the spring and rotary member from the rotor and the seal seat or lip seals from the pump end of the casing of the three larger size pumps (H. HJ. HL). Reassembly Reassembly of these pumps is explained by one of the follow- ing sets of instructions. Follow the instructions for the proper pump model. Before starting to reassemble the pump, clean all parts thoroughts and replace those which show signs of excessive wear or damage. ) To Reassemble Model G75 or GG75 Up Seal Pumps: (see Figure 7) 1. INSTALL THE LIP SEALS. The lip seals should be in stalled in the casing one at a time from the large flanged end. The sealing lips must face away from each other. NOTE: Use an arbor press with an arbor of 2-3/16* diameter and press the lip seals in the casing as far as they will go. See Figures 7, 8, 9 and 10 for a cross section of your pump models. 2. LUBRICA TE THE LIP SEALS. Fill the area between the lips of the lip seals with grease. 3. INSTALL THE ROTOR. Flush the rotor hub with light oil (not grease) and insert the rotor in the casing with the hub through the lip seals. ' ' , VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation cedar Fans iowa 506i3uSA DO A 134884 CONFIDENT IAL. TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL VIKING C PUMP ITEM 1 7 J 1 1 t 1 1 1 KAMI OF FART an lot Motor Shaft (Foil length) Said Ring (Used with Mech See' Pomps Ontr' Mec*a"rcai Su> (Complete' l<e Su> ?> Camg Capscrews (Fump to Motori Law (For Rei*! Valve or Cove* Plate' *<#* Valve ffty Vj*tf or C<*r FIGURE S EXPLODED VIEW SERIES 7& l 47S PUMPS ("G" & "GG" SIZE) ITEM NAME OF PUT 10 i |: IJ It 1 is It IJ It F-W Plugs- .* 1Mtc*>u Sft* -7 *' Mk Su' Fme lg> lip Su< Fomoi lora> wr tOW tlVlrAI ClW 'For Head' HUS CiPSC'ewS ((O' Hftfl c ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FAME OF FART Key For Motor Shaft (Full Length) Capscrews (Pump to Motor) Casing Machine Sctew (2 for Mech Seal Pump. 1 lor Lip Seal Pump) Pipe Plugs--X ' Gasket (For Relief Valve or Cover Plate) Relief Valve Capscrews (For Relief Valve or Cover Plate) Mechanical Seal (Complete) riiM 10 11 12 13 14 15 IS 17 NAME OF FART Lip Seal (2) Rotor Idler Idler Bushing Gasket (For Head) Idler Pin Head Capscrews (For Head) VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation cedar Fails. iowa506i3uSA A 1348SB DO y riCMT T At- C VIKING PUMP TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL CAUTION: TURN THE ROTOR BACK AND FORTH AS YOU EXERT ENOUGH FORCE TO PUSH IT THROUGH THE LIP SEAL AND TO THE BOTTOM OF THE CAS ING. BE CAREFUL NOT TO FOLD UNDER THE LIP OF THE INNER SEAL. 4. INSTALL THE IDLER, Put the idler with bushing on the idler pin. 5. PLACE THE HEAD CASKETS ON THE PUMP HEAD. The proper amount of gaskets should be used to provide necessary end clearance within the pump so it turns freely with no appreciable end play. Gasket Table 1 gives the normal amount of gaskets used. 6THE HEAD CAN NOW BE ASSEMBLED ON THE PUMP. Tilt the top of the head away from the pump slightly until the crescent enters the inside diameter of the rotor and rotate the idler until its teeth mesh with the rotor teeth. Do not damage the head gaskets. Note correct posi tion of idler and crescent (See Figure 7 and Disassembly Step 2). Tighten the head capscrews and then check the SECTIONAL DRG. OF MODELS G75 AND GG75 LIP SEAL PUMPS 7. CHECK PUMP END CLEARANCE. Measure the clear ance between the back of the rotor and the machined sur face in the bottom of the casing by inserting a feeler gauge through the port opening. This is the end clearance; nor mal amount is 0.003" to 0.005'. Add or remove gaskets until this figure is reached. GASKET TABU 1 PUMP MODELS C75 and GG75 Lip Seal Pumps NORMAL AMOUNT USED .010" .015" ONE SET OF GASKETS CONSISTS Of THE FOLLOWING 2-005 * Plishc 3- 002" Plutic 8. BOLT THE VALVE TO THE CASING. Place the valve gasket and valve or covcrplate on the pump and fasten securely with the four capscrews. CAUTION: BE SURE THE ADJUSTING SCREW OF THE RELIEF VALVE POINTS TOWARD, THE SUCTION PORT. 9. ASSEMBLE THE PUMP ON THE MOTOR. Install the full length key in the keyway of the motor shaft. NOTE; Key must be full length to avoid misalignment of the pump rotor which could cause serious damage to the pump. Slide the pump on the motor shaft and fasten securely with the four capscrews. To Reassemble Model H75, HJ75 or HL75 Lip Seal Pumps: (see Figure 8) 1. INSTALL THE LIP SEALS The hp seals should be in stalled in the casing one at a time from the head end. The sealing lips must face away from each Other. NOTE: Use an arbor press with an arbo'f of 2-3/16" diam eter and press the Up seals in the casing as far as they will go. 2. LUBRICA TE THE LIP SEALS. Fill the area between the lips of the lip seals with grease. 3. INSTALL THE ROTOR. Flush the rotor hub with light oil (not grease) and insert the rotor in the casing with the hub through the hp seals. CAUTION: TURN THE ROTOR BACK AND FORTH AS YOU EXERT ENOUGH FORCE TO PUSH IT THROUGH THE LIP SEALS AND TO THE BOTTOM OF THE CAS ING. BE CAREFUL NOT TO FOLD UNDER THE LIP OF THE INNER SEAL, 4. INSTALL THE IDLER. Put the idler with, bushing on the idler pin. 5. PLACE THE HEAD CASKETS ON THE PUMP HEAD. The proper amount of gaskets should be used to provide the necessary end clearance within the pump so it turns freely with no appreciable end play. Gasket Table 2 gives the normal amount of gaskets used. 6. THE HEAD CAN NOW BE ASSEMBLED ON THE PUMP. Tilt the top of the head away from the pump slightly until the crescent enters the inside diameter of the rotor and rotate the idler until its teeth mesh with the rotor teeth. Do not damage the head gaskets. Note correct posi tion of idler and crescent. (See Figure 8 and Disassembly Step 2). Tighten the head capscrews and then check the end clearance. 7. CHECK PUMP END CLEARANCE. Measure the clear ance between the back of the rotor and the machined sur face in the bottom of the casing by inserting a feeler gauge through the port opening. This is the end clearance. Nor- VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation cedar Fails, towa 50613 u s A OO A !34fiSfe CONFIDENT I At TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL VIKING O PUMP AND HL75 LIP SEAL PUMPS mal amount is 0.003" to 0.005". Add or remove gaskets until this figure is reached. CASKET TABU 2 RUMP MODELS Htb HJ75 and Ht75 bp Sul PtfTips NORMAL AMOUNT USED 010' - 015- ONE SET OF GASKETS CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING 2-002' Plastic 3- 006' Paper 8. BOLT THE VAL VE TO THE CASING. Place the valve gasket and valve or coverplate on the pump and fasten securely with the four capscrews. CAUTION: BE SURE THE ADJUSTING SCREW OF THE RELIEF VALVE POINTS TOWARD THE SUCTION PORT. 9. ASSEMBLE THE PUMP ON THE MOTOR. Install the full length key in the keyway of the motor shaft. NOTE: Key must be full length to avoid misalignment of the pump rotor which could cause serious damage to the pump. Slide the pump on the motor shaft and fasten securely with the four capscrews. To Reassemble Model G475 or GG475 Mechanical Seal Pumps: (see Figure 9) 1.INSTALL THE ROTOR IN THE CASING. 2. INSTALL THE IDLER. Put the idler with bushing on the idler pin. 3. PLACE THE HEAD GASKETS ON THE HEAD. The proper amount of gaskets should be used to provide the necessary end clearance within the pump so it turns freely with no appreciable end play. Gasket Table 3 gives the normal amount of gaskets used. CASKET TABU 3 PUMP MODELS CJ75 <i> CG475 Mtcn Sol RiimM NORMAL AMOUNT USED 010* ots* ONE SET OF GASKETS CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING WM 1s s1 TO"| | 4. THE HEAD CAN NOW BE ASSEMBLED ON THE PUMP. Tilt the top of the head away from the pump slightly until the crescent enters the inside diameter of the rotor and rotate the idler until its teeth mesh with the rotor teeth. Do not damage the head gaskets. Note correct posi tion of idler and crescent (see Figure 9 and Disassembly Step 2). Tighten the head capscrews and then check the end clearance. MOUNTING FIGURE 9 SECTIONAL DRG. OF MODELS G475 AND GG475 MECH. SEAL PUMPS 5. CHECK PUMP END CLEARANCE. Measure the clear ance between the back of the rotor and the machined sur face in the bottom of the casing by inserting a feeler gauge through the port opening. This is the end clearance. Nor mal amount is 0.003 ' to 0.005'. Add or remove gaskets until this figure is reached. VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation Cedar Fails, iowa506i3USA DO A 1.34887 CONFTDFNTTAL ( VIKING PUMP TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL 6. INSTALL THE MECHANICAL SEAL. Slide the seal spring washer over the rotor hub as far as it will go. Flush the rotor hub and seal housing bore with light oil (not grease) and assemble spring, rotary member and seat of the mechanical seal in position (see Figure 9). CAUTION: NEVER TOUCH THE SEALING FACES OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL WITH ANYTHING EXCEPT FINGERS OR A CLEAN CLOTH. 7. INSTALL THE SNAP RING. Install the snap ring in the groove in the casing. This will hold the seal at its proper working length. 8. BOLT THE VALVE TO THE CASING. Place the valve gasket and valve or coverplate on the pump and fasten securely with the four capscrews. PUMP MODUS H475. MJ475 MS HL475 MkImimoI Sal Pumm GASKET TABU 4 NORMAL AMOUNT USED 010- .015' ONE SET Of CASKETS CONSISTS Of THE FOLLOWING 2-- 002 ' Plate 2- 006- Faetr 6. THE HEAD CAN NOW BE ASSEMBLED ON THE PUMP. Tilt the top of the head away from the pump slightly until the crescent enters the inside diameter of the rotor and rotate the idler until its teeth mesh with the rotor teeth. Do not damage the head gaskets. Note correct posi tion of idler and crescent. (See Figure 10 and Disassembly Step 2). Tighten the head capscrews and then check the end clearance. CAUTION: BE SURE THE ADJUSTING SCREW OF THE RELIEF VALVE POINTS TOWARD THE SUCTION PORT. 9 ASSEMBLE THE PUMP ON THE MOTOR Install the full length key in the keyway of the moior shaft NOTE: Key must be full length to avoid misalignment of ( the pump which could cause serious damage to the pump Slide the pump on the motor shaft and fasten securely with the four capscrews. To Reassemble Model H475, HJ475 or HL475 Mechanical Seal Pumps: (see Figure 10) 1. INSTALL THE SEAL SEAT. Lubricate the outside di ameter of the seal seat and the inside of the seal housing bore with light oil (not grease). Stan the seal seal in the casing and press into place. CAUTION: NEVER TOUCH THE SEALING FACES OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL WITH ANYTHING EXCEPT THE FINGERS OR A CLEAN CLOTH. 2. INSTALL THE ROTARY MEMBER OF SEAL Flush the rotor hub and the inside of the rotary member with light oil. Slide the spring and rotary member over the rotor hub only far enough to hold the spring in position. Do not compress the spring at this time. 3. INSTALL THE ROTOR IN THE CASING. 4. INSTALL THE IDLER. Put the idler with bushing on the idler pin. 5. PLACE THE HEAD GASKETS ON THE HEAD. The proper amount of gaskets should be used to provide the necessary end clearance within the pump so it turns freely L with no appreciable end play. Gasket Table 4 gives the normal amount of gaskets used. FIGURE 10 SECTION DRG. OF MODELS H475. HJ475 AND HL47S MECH. SEAL PUMPS 7. CHECK PUMP END CLEARANCE. Measure the clear ance between the back of the rotor and the machined sur face in the bottom of the casing by inserting a feeler gauge through the port opening. This is the end clearance; nor mal amount is 0.003 * and 0.005 *. Add or remove gaskets until this figure is reached. 8. BOLT THE VAL VE TO THE CASING. Place the valve gasket and valve or coverplate on the pump and fasten securely with the four capscrews. CAUTION: BE SURE THE ADJUSTING SCREW OF THE RELIEF VALVE POINTS TOWARD THE SUCTION PORT. VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation cedar Fans. iowa506i3uSA DO A 134888 CONFIDENTIAL TECHNICAL SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE SPECIAL MOUNTED PUMPS SERIES 75 AND 475 SIZES G-HL VIKING C PUMP 9. ASSEMBLE THE PUMP ON THE MOTOR. Install the full length key in the keyway of the motor shaft. NOTE: Key must be full length to avoid misalignment of the pump rotor which could cause serious damage to the pump. Slide the pump on the motor shaft and fasten se curely with the four capscrews. SAFETY RELIEF VALVE INSTRUCTIONS PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT If the pressure setting of the safety relief valve is to be changed from that which the factory has set, the following instructions should be carefully followed: Remove the valve cap which covers the adjusting screw, and loosen the lock nut which locks the adjusting screw so pressure setting will not change during operation of pump, A pressure gauge somewhere in the dis charge line must be used for actual adjustment operation. The adjusting screw should be turned in for increasing the pressure or turned out for decreasing the pressure. With the discharge line closed at a point beyond the pressure gauge, the gauge will show the maximum pressure the valve will allow while pump is in operation. IMPORTANT In ordering pans for safety relief valve, always be sure to give Model and Serial Number of pump as it appears on name plate and the name of the pan wanted. When ordenng springs, be sure also to give the pressure setting desired. i v** Cjp a Sarm J IdO Nut 4 S0T*f U-Of 5 ton* 6 *** to> / I *0pQH 9 Cm GtUfi Disassembly NOTE: Mark valve and head to be sure they are reassembled in the same relative position. 1. Remove valve cap. 2. Measure and record the length of extension of the ad justing screw. See "A" on figure 11. 3. Loosen the lock nut and back out adjusting screw until spring pressure is released. 4. Remove bonnet, spring guide, spring and poppet from valve body. Clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage and replace as necessary. Assembly Follow the procedure outlined under disassembly. If valve is removed for repairs, be sure to replace in same posi tion. The valve cap should point towards the suction port. inKING PUMP WARRANTY Viking warrants all products manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship or material for a period of one ill vear from dale of startup, provided that in no event shall this warrants extend more than eighteen (181 months from the date of shipment from Viktng. If. during said warranty period, any products sold by Viking prove to be defective in workman ship or material under normal use and service, and if such products are returned to Viking's factory at Cedar Falls, Iowa, transportation charges prepaid, and if the products are found by Viking to be defective in workmanship or material, they will be replaced or repaired free of charge, F.O.B. Cedar Falls, Iowa. Viking assumes no liability for consequential damages of any kind and the purchaser by acceptance of delivery assumes all liability for the consequences of the use or misuse of Viking products by the purchaser, his employees or others. Viking will assume no field expense for service or parts unless authorized by it in advance. Equipment and accessories purchased by Viking from out side sources which are incorporated into any Viking product are warranted only to the extent of and by the original manufacturer's warranty or guarantee, if any. THIS IS VIKINC'S SOLE WARRANTY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING IN PARTICULAR ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA BILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No officer or employee of 1DEX Corporation or Viking Pump, Inc. is authorized to alter this warranty. Copyright 1988 MPC 5M 5-88 VIKING PUMR INC. A Unit of IDEX Corporation cedar Fans, iowa506i3USA Printed in U S A. DO A 134889 OONFTDFNTTAL cm Zo36'2 p 7 Pressure Fitters Models 15P, 30P and 30PD Installation and Specification Data Model 30P Specifications Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP); 3,000 psi (207 bar) Design Safety Factor: 3 to 1 Rated Fatigue Pressure: 2,000 psi (138 bar) per NFPA/T3.10.5.1Category 2/90 Warning: Maximum absolute system pressure must not exceed filter's rated fatigue pressure (RFP) of 2,000 psi if the system frequently cycles between 0 and RFP. Also, limitations on fittings may restrict operating pressure to less than rated static pressure (RSP) of 3,000 psi. Refer to SAE J1065, Table 2 for fitting recommendations. Please consult Parker Hydraulic Filter Division if you have questions about your application. Operating Temperatures: 225'F to -40'F (107`C to -40'C) Element Collapse Rating: 150 psi (10 bar). 03B, 10B--350 psi (24 bar) High Collapse: 03BH, 10BH--2,000 psi (138 bar). 03BX, 10BX~3,000 psi (209 bar) Visual Indicator (optional) Differential pressure type Electrical Indicator (optional): Electri cal Switch rated 5A at 115/230 VAC, 5A resistive and 3A inductive at 28VDC. Color Coding: White (N.C.), Red (N.O.), Black (common) Filter Housing: Anodized 6061-T6 Aluminum. Weights (approximate): 30P-1 6.4 lb. (2.9 kg) 30P-2 8.7 lb. (3.9 kg) 30PD-1 361b. (16.3 kg) 30PD-2 401b. (18.1 kg) For additional information - call your local 108 Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. DO A 134890 CONFIDENTIAL Pressure Filters Models 15P, 30P and 30PD Filter Service When servicing a filter, use the following procedure: A. Stop the system's power unit. B. Relieve pressure in filter line. C. Rotate bowl counter-clockwise and remove, D. Remove element from housing Discard all disposable elements These elements are not cleanable. E. Place new, clean element in housing, centering it m the head F. Inspect the o-rmg seal and replace if necessary. G. Replace bowl. Rotate clockwise and tighten to specified torque (see pgs 9 and 10). Parts List INDEX DESCRIPTION ) HEAD INLINE Porting Byoe no*caio pon No Bypass indicator port MANIFOLD Porting Byoass indicator pori No oypass indicator pon 2 BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY 50 D>d No oyoass 3 ELEMENTS 4 (See Chan Below) BOWL O-RING Bona N (Nitnie) Vlton 5 BOWL Standard S#ngie Sta^oard DouO*e WWrt>>aa>nr' OS'o"i9w*Me 6 DRAIN PvdG wW/NBi?/0'a- N in ''^i o ? NAMEPLATE e DRIVE SCREWS 9 TvSESwe* to MOUNTING BRACKrT AIT 1i Blank err nrwf MOtCATQR KJT Mintm--I *swgi t? V 1*4 *-. 9-4 13 * lul DCIfc gC 111443 Vk4 poc ^ -e*4 or 4A, f tcu'rha *4 w f ec - r# % MANBOld MOUNT*INiGr-*KH *Qoi xr *< e.t-etv #-c T twi PARTNUMBER ISP SOP S3U36 926083 93U35 926066 N/A N/A 926S18926510* 92652l' 92652r 926(22 92S209 NV9972113386 926102 926103 992255995543 920462 92252' 920979 99C2133*4963 Na 925515 92*4*6 97956' 97956-> 9977994596C* H* NV3922115511 926036 992266004309 926041 920462 92252i 970928 903393 N* 99225455>653 9?*4>6 99972799955566647* 997759556920 quantity 1 1 t 1 1 Qom*i i 2OP*n. OOCOk'OOnnaa OP'^rVi1 OpeN ** 1**# if# i JP'i m>2 >.s *> 9,*** *; 97*49; 99?7376677* 975637 TOC I." >N *.'< 97549* 97796* 972675 99775566334J 3 03oCc T'oke 036 ioeC3B" 974J9** 9755*, 9977?5**6w*M*: 99977X4535399*6*; 97560C 99775V6C"T 975669 9972N77.66A773* 97767? 97767' 997234544243 9356J4 97N56436 97563? 997755663389 925640 '00* C381 979642 97 "7* 99779"64733 997J**9*6i?3 9922**996645 Parker Filt r Divisi n Metamora, Ohio 43540 DO A 134891 CONFTDFNTTAI Motion & Control 109 Model Code for 15P, 30P AND 30PD FILTERS how to ordr Selecl the deseed symbol (in me correct position) to construct a model code. BOX 4 ELEMENT MEDIA SYMBOL DESCRIPTION' 4^ INire mesn 25tA W.re mesn 43S* SymneliC liOe' ?X Ce"u'ose IX Cenjiose I C3C Cei'uiose | 10B* M C'OgasS ! C3BJ V cogiass i 'See "Etemen: Performance* data in j cata'pg to' i.trrat'on ratings j 0' h.gn collapse rated (2000 dsiO) | eiemen-.s aao *H' oenino 10B o' 03B* | fo' 3000 DS'd collapse rated elements add 'X' oenino 10B or 03BT BOX 5: INDICATOR SYMBOL DESCRIPTION N No indicator, no pressure port P Port plugged, top mounted PS Port plugged, side mounted M Pop-up, top mounted. MS Pop-up, side mounted. Mi Pop-up with thermal lockout, top mounted MSI Pop-up with thermal lockout, side mounted R Rotary dial top mounted RS Rotary dial, side mounted E Electrical indicator top mount with v^-14 NPT connection and 12* leads ES Same as *E' except s>de mounted BOX 7: PORTS FILTER MODEL SYMBOL 15P MM 15P XX 30P NN 30P XX 1 DESCRIPTION SAE-12 (Standard) manifold porting SAE-16 (Standard) 1*--marjilotd porting4 'Customer supplies subplate adaptor, or purchases optional Parker subplate BOX 8: OPTIONS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 1 None 11 No bypass 19 SAE 5 dram port on Dow! T2t No pysass & o'a n pon BOX 6: BYPASS OR INDICATOR SETTING SYMBOL DESCRIPTION' 50 50 osid ill *no bypass' 00t'0h (-11) and an mpcator is selected "50' denotes mocator calibration NOTE Military automotive anc Din connectors are aiso ava'iape Please contact the wter o viS'on 10ption a^ects pnce o` iitte' BOX 9: DESIGN NUMBER Apa tc we' assempu p> Pa'ner Fine' D-vVO- use me tji <Jter mooe cooe inc'jo ng me oes gn numpe' wnen oroe' <ng repiacemen- parts eemenisiana cartridges I Accessories Kits j Mount.ng Space's (15) j two reoji'eo l Mount-ng B'acfcet Kit (30p) i Suppiate Kit (30p) 925650 925563 925562 For additional information - call your local 0 Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. DO A 134892 CONFIDENTIAL 70-600 Series The Bronze 3-Way Diversion Apollo0 FEATURES Reinlorced TFE seats and seals Chromium plated balls Larne ports 400 WOG ruled operation KXTX. tested air under water PHESS/TFMP CHART Cm3o3t,-Z -rg O 100 2'0 '*) 400 TEMP I * ROW PATTF.ttN Vlf W H-OM TOf* ------ ROTATION----------------- 90* 4V NOTE; OPEN PORT PRESSURE MUST EXCEED CLOSED PORT PRESSURE BRONZE 3-WAY NUMBER 70-603 70 604 70-605 70-606 70-607 70-603 SIZE V, V, 1 \V. P/2 2 ABCDE F .50 1.09 2.25 1 75 3.87 1.18 .68 1.50 3U> *'2*. 4.87 1.62 .81 1.59 3.IB 2.25 4.87 1.71 1.00 1.97 3.95 2.69 5.50 2.01 1.25 2.21 4.40 2.87 5.50 2.38 1.50 2.34 4.69 3.00 5.50 2.50 G .87 .87 .87 .93 -- -- `The Cv factor is the gallons of water per minute that the valve will pass with 1 PS1 pressure drop. S H I Cv* 1.37 10-24 6 1.37 10-24 12 1.37 10-24 14 1.50 /-20 22 -- -- 30 -- -- 50 DO A 134893 CONFIDENTIAL Standard Apollo Ball Valve Components Breakdown COOL VINYL GRIP FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE INSTALLATIONS reinforce: tfi stuffing box ring STEM-BLOW OUT PROOF DESIGN t REINFORCED TFE THRUST-SEAL WASHER BODY-BRONZE. 316 S.S.. CARBON STEEL BARSTOCK, OR CAST CARBON STEEL BALL-CHROME PLATED BRONZE OR STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL REINFORCED TFE SEATS ARE STANDARD RETAINER 4 D0 A 13489A coNftdfnttM- Valves LHA a Cr112636--2 #<=; Bali Valves - High Pressure Specifications Steel body Steel, hard chromium plated ball Ball seals -- Delrin t)'-Rings --Vrton Aluminum handles on larger sizes Options * Sizes Irom V-2'NPT SAE Steel handles on Od, 06 and 08 sizes Dimensions HBV Series .i Working Part Pons Pressure SW Wt NO. NPT SAE (psi) in mm in mm m mm m mm m mm m mm m mm in mm in mm n HBV-04 A" V20 9000 2.7 69 1 4 X Ml :i. 1 7 43 32 05 12 5 04 11 04 9 46 118 07 HBV-06 V 18 7250 31 79 1 7 43 I 3 r t 7 43 15 38 07 175 04 11 04 9 4,6 118 i r HBV-08 /a" *16 5800 4.1 104 19 48 1 1 3i> 1 7 43 1C 40 0 75 19 04 11 04 9 "4 6 118 1 7 HBV-12 V." 4500 4.3 109 24 6? Ml 49 23 58 22 57 10 24 5 06 14 06 14 7.2 182 17 HBV-16 1" 1VU-12 4500 46 117 26 w. 2 3 !>8 23 58 2C 65 1.2 29.5 06' "l4~ 06 14 ~U 182 51 HBV-20 IK" 1*12 4500 4.3 110 3.2 80 30 76 2.3 59 33 84 1.5 38 ' 06 15 0.7 17 8.5 218 7.0 HBV-24 1J4" 1*12 4500 5.1 130 3.3 85 36 92 23 59 39 99 18 46 0.6 15 07 17 85 218 9.5 HBV-32 2" - 4500 5.5 140 39 100 4 2 106 23 59 44 111"' 21 53 06 15 0.7 17 8.5 CO 22.0 Ordering Information Product Type HBV Ball Valve - High Pressure __ Handles HBVH-040608 HBVH-040608 HBVH-040608 HBVH-1216 HBVH-1216 Replacement Parts Seal Kit HBV-SK04 HBV-SK06 HBV-SK08 HBV-SK12 HBV-SK16 HBVH-202432 HBVH-202432 HBV-SK20 HBV-SK24 HBVH-202432 HBV-SK32 Valve Size 04 06 08 12 16 20 24 32 HBV - 04 DO A 134895 CONFIDENTIAL Thread Type N NPT S SAE Thread Size 04 !4" 06 *** 08 r 12 16 1" 20 114" 24 Ifc" 32 2" Colorflow Service Parts cn^su~z #u POPPET SPRING Check Valves Needle Valves ( Metering Valves C BOOY SIZE C 200 C400 C 620 C 600 C 820 C 800 C 1020 C 1200 C 1220 C 1420 C 1600 C 1620 C 2000 C 2020 C 2400 C 2420 C 3200 C 3220 POPPET (SOFT SEAL) METAL BUNA VITON 013155-3 013320-N7 013320-V7 001490-3 001839-N7 001839-V7 004374-3 004917-N7 004917-V7 007300-3 007596-N7 007596-V7 010353-3 0103533 025299-3 02529*3 077'95 3 Q22'96 3 07i43 3 076'43 3 CX'6fr 3 CX'6 3 N/A N/A N/A Hi A NA HA NA HA NA NA N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SPRINGS 5 PS! PSl 013151 013215 001516 001585 004394 004496 007310 007379 010371 010371 025314 025314 022192 022192 026139 026139 030158 030158 010453 010453 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A BOOt Si2E N 200 N 400 N 620 N 600 N 820 N 800 N 1020 N 1200 N 1220 N 1420 N 1600 N 1620 N 2000 N 2020 r i'C*N ' *'C*V 7 2006N * | 7006. * 7006S ' 7006. 7 20'ON ' TC'Ov 7 2C'*N 7 2C"VT 2C'7N 7 70i2v 7 2H?N 7 2112V 7 2117N 7 2H2V-7 7H3N 7 2H3V-7 nc NONE 107X6 0tvt SCREW 013300 LOCK SC*CW 001832 001830 001832 107X8 004677 004691 107X10 007523 007524 107X11 010673 010678 107X12 010673 010678 107X112 025543 025544 107X112 025543 025544 107X113 025543 0 25544 BOOY SIZE 2" 4** 620 6" 820 8" 1020 12*' 1220 0*6 Buna vrroN 2010N-7 2010V-7 2011N-7 2011V-7 BACKUP PING 400004-1 400004-2 FOLLOWER 014012-2 002028-2 WASHER 014013-2 002023-2 handle 014083-6 SELF* LOCKIN NUT 45400 002118-6 45400 2012N-7 2012V-7 400004-3 005017-2 005012-2 005065-6 45700 211 IN-7 2111V-7 400004-4 008013-2 008014-2 008079-6 45900 2112N-7 2112V-7 400004-5 011013-2 011014-2 . .011066-6 45900 DO A 134896 CONFTDFNTTAL Ruidpower Gnnnell "2. nr HHHOMIMMI V Figure No. 3010 125# Bronze Gate Valve Y4,#-3" Figure No. 3010 SJ 125# Bronze Gate Valve %"-3" 125 PSI Saturated Steam, 200 PSI Non-Shock Cold Water, Oil, or Gas Rising Stem ATWA 3 7 M n H fl Threaded Conforms to Federal Specification WW-V-54 Class A. Tyy* tt & t/SS-SP-SO Copper to Copper Screwed Bonnet * Rising Stem Solid Atedge Disc Material Dai Part t. Handwheel Nut 2. Identification Plate 1 Handwheel 4. Stem $. Packing Nut Speoticaiaan ?mc PU(p<3 SipH mtft Qe*t Ctoomat* AJuminum Aluminum AST W B-8j Alloy A03600 Silicon Bronte ASTM B-371 Alloy C69400 or B-99 Alloy C65100 H04 Bronze ASTM B-62 or ASTM 8-584 Alloy C84400 Mommal Sut t Vit /4 1 VI, Dimensions -- Weights Dimensions ABc Appro*. Approx. Net Wt. Net WT. Fig. 3010 Fig. 3010SJ 1"/,. 4V, -- .6 -- 1"/,. 4*/. 'V,* .6 .6 1'V. 4 V. V, .7 .6 2'/i 5'V,* Tk 1.0 .9 2'h, 73/ji 1 1.7 1.5 2/. ev. 1J/lt 2.4 2.1 6. Packing Gland 7. Packing 8. Bonnet 9. Body Bronze ASTM B-62 or ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 or ASTM 3-202 or B-16 Non-Asbestos/Graphite/ Aramid Fiber Bronze ASTM B-62 Bronze ASTM B-62 Vh 2'h 9u/i# IV* 2 3V,n 11*/l* 1*/l 2'/i 4 '/ 14*/, 1'/l 3 4 V? 16'/i 1 '>/.* t No packing gland, packing only in thesa uzes 3.3 S.O 10.5 15.0 3.1 4.7 9.4 13.3 10. Wedge Bronze ASTM B-62 DO A 134897 CONFTDFNTTAl 4 NIBCO '*i - IT # valve installation tips H 7 r SOLDERING AND SILVER BRAZING Analyze the application to determine wmcn valve i* best tu-we % aiaiiation keeping m mmo mo Hmci tor wnwn pi# verve iaco-- mended Baiora intieiimg ma correct veive review na ' 'pa> Wruciiona 10 prevent oemege to me veive ano MhK* at ! ^ atiica^ct Cat tuOa ano Muara Heem Purr size J Uaa aano ewm O' *iaa< am to ciaan pom tuOa ano uv ta mala Siaa> aooi nor recommended 3 Aoo*y hvi to ovtswe o' taoa ano *>we ot aotoar cwo Sur*ece* ta aa itnnao "hut pa comomta-y covered Uaa hui toangy a Be aura mat vatva a hHv ooe" *pp>y naat to tvde leei t-*ne*e- aa "vc* naat as possible mrougr. tuOa mio vatva A.OW p-a i|at riew> mg o* vatva itaatt aa Suva' Brazing Method AaaamoM party to Da Drarao a Nivao pans ara snowed >e den* ma |tr m me ttua wilt avaporata ano onao Mur * ama w '*> an eiposmg metxi surfaces teOkWabO" Aaaamom on Dy manng kat "to socket naro aga>nat ma amp Tna tuvnOi 0uW aa auooonao ao mat it wui 'em*-" augment pu>-ng ma mar mg m aration MOTE On one men ano lergm rant a a"u" <o anng lOmt up to temperature at on# tuna a aa traouona, aa W ilia a aouDta tip toren to mamtaut ma propa* tamps larger araa A mtio pre-neetmg at ma wnore socaa* manoao Apply naal to party la Da pomao Tna PVV"i by o#y-ecetyiene flame Haat luoa Itrat Dagmrvmg ana m ot vatva Sweep Mama arouno tuoa m anon yirmaa id ngnt angtaa to run ot tuoa To avo>o Dsrmmg mrpugn ume Should ba in continuoua motion and not snowed to uva11 Apply Mama to vatva at Maa ot socket Haat t Mama Mom vatva to tuoa until ttua on vatva aicaaatva naatmg ot vatva. Whan Mux appears liquid ano transparent on Pom tuba and i Start sweeping llama back and forth along axis o* ro-nt to asamtam hast on parts to ba lomao. aapaoaliy towaro base ot vptvo socket S. Uaa iust anougti solder: with wtra sowar, uaa V.* igrtU vama ate If too much soldar is used. 11 may flow past luPa stop and ctog seating sras. Whan joint is tilled, a continuous run at sower O' erasing *noy will ba visible. Sa. Silver Brazing Method: Apply brazing wira or rod at point where tuba enters vatva socket Keep flsma sway from rod or wire as it is lad into tna town Move llama back and lorth as alloy is drawn into joint When tna proper ta *av evra a reached aiWv will Mow readily into space between i>av avia' wax ano vanra socket When joint is Itiled, a continuous m m brazing aaoy will Pa visible He mi .a twau aowa' witn email brush while plastic, leaving a fatet wsuna ano a> vorva as it coots Silver BRAZING Tna awangm ar a Brazed touii ooes not vary aooreciabiV with the d'Merent maxmg mpimwis bu> daoanos to a large extern upon me maintenance a* avow cworence oatwaan tna outswa o< tna tuba and ma va>ve soexat Tna *ww a mansons 0t silver brazing valve soexets ara machined to me c o--S' m a'a"cas and iirusnad smooth to promote Igii capillary el ect I C^e anouie ba observed m cleaning ano in 'amoving raiWuas 0< ma (arm W8 i Anempting to braze a contammaiad or improperly Caa-aa Surface w result in an unsaltstaciory joint. Silver brazing alloys ww "a> w aver or bond lo Oxides Oily or grassy surfaces repel lluies. i wmcn oxwiza and result in vows ano inclusions Threading On W"i *> any loreign matter accumulated m the pipe can hinder efficient i ace'so" and seriously damage vital valve pans. Thoroughly ctaan i witn an or siaam I owe. gauge pipe threads lot size and length to avow de agamsi seat and disc Thorougiy ciaan thraaoed and to any harmful steal o' iron deposits. For good joint, use tetion It pioa dope is used, apply sparingly on pipe threads. ' on verve threads. Do not allow any pipe dopa into valve body in ardor to avow damage w disc and saat. Ba*ora installation, check line of How through valve so that valve will luncuo" property CWse valve completely before installation. Apply wr*ncn to nas next to pipe and guard agamai possible distortion. Attar mstasanoA ot vatva. support line: s sagging pipe lino can distort tna valve ano causa torture. FLANGED There ara savaral steps to follow lo make aura that a Hanged joint will ba prooeriy assembled. First clean the joint carefully. Than loosely as semble ma joint by putting in the bottom two or three bolts. Then carefully insert the gasket into piece. The bottom bolts will help locate the gasket and hold it m position. Than insert the rest of the bolts into place and tighten all el the bolts evenly - not in rotation, but by the erase over method to Wad the bolts evenly and eliminate concentrated stresses. The bolts should be checked tor tightness after an appropriate interval ot uaa and retightened it necessary iJ U NIBCO INC., ELKHART, INDIANA DO A 134898 103 CONFIDENTIAL Cl 00 B100 cioo i moo _ e1 _ tot to ]yf l. -* ' 1 Cli to* - SCt^ J * Mi C. HOiS -- tt5 ti *in ii1 w Switches for NEMA 4, ctn<$3o3''i General Purpose Service * 13 Introducing a family of low-cost pressure and temperature switches for the process plant or OEM Wide selection of adjustable ranges within 3-5000 psi and -180 to 1000F SPOT switch output; optional hermetic seal switch and terminal block for Div. II service. Internal reference scales and adjustment lock Enclosure design permits safe and easy access for wiring Many models available from stock | Maintenance Instructions I emperature C ntr Is 00, El oo, FIoo M-T100-, Specifications AppttfvniS' M rf.KH' Icrnttofnitifi' Atiilie-ui ! m )|m*f.iiiift* him!:; leek Vi !* 1* I It |r |H> < I | . jtx. ||h e* # I * l I * 1 li |l **! t (*| # i* < t* I I* * I . # l * l ii.e. A I ( (it |< .. I * t .!. (* , I >1. > t bit M ( - ' ll- ! I * i ll *, It t* ! il I ^ a I ! .il IC. i< u | * It n ('ltd* In * UL listed (except model 706). CSA cedlied (exccpl model 706). Optinnnl Class I Dtv 2 Gioups A,B,C.D; Class II Group G (consult UE) -6b in 16(1 F 40 In 160 F. ("irnpl mndrls 701-706, 0lr>16f> l inl Iviw .illy shills less Ilian l,K. ill f.ut)*' Im i hr> I i?H Ci runliHMii li-mi*-failin' rnarv|- ;.h |iii iiya1,in. .'ilti IhG, 10 iniNiscnml ilutnlxm :. ii,aiMii-iii-.ii-..iit'i :"i(,_6 `jixici*. IJI MA 4 -lx wtH-n tr^il wild upiMiii MOIfi li-ifili-f.iliin-M. li-l'i ` 1ik iHltuslhl.li* i.iihip ly.-.-jin-iiA.ii-i-. /m /on ."/o ;i/6 1`S'i.i .icijii.H.ii pm i`ii, i.l;'I Jin I `y- d ||M iiil4i l.tllli I `41 >1 li la- wiful "fnifm.lMy (nn*ft* i tatfftLiliv i mj> I ,M4i 4MM VAT frsrJtvr I te i.(l (it |tt(HH M11 i 111 *f t t |l*< . (it |fMH till 11 L H I (IK `t Inn* J t i l.r^t *b*r I MJitei.t , Ul ' Ijf'l j.'t * i kllfte `b biw* htail*, tlJlMI ,>, t^J n|f|-. I'fH I'M 1 "IJIMI t. |tt I , i ^tf e-f cn t*pl tie eicl1, MMl l M*HtM 1-1/ `i, iHih ff *l '/lift v i . tf >tII if > f * k. I tl. M le t., n; iiii , *. , id ..Ml- i M'H ; M'lpl 1 in. .ii m ^ till 1,1*. ills t < 4 i.iMifi in k l'-< UN rt'tl< *v . , m. Iiik i i /\ \ I .iMilm -Mt i Ifi illi ilM M | Uilh . Mb d f \ * nnt mb i h,im |f') M him . i * '. .uni i b -Mill lw '**. tl a# i v 111m iM .b * b l*i I Hv II (vii ; l i at*jHt U( h*SK j*HKl SfXKTlffCa^V *Of ln ,t tr<* Ha ) IIMl IftfiVi; ^OtKZlMKi dtHdtraitniri. AvriikiiA- with types BiOO and E100 blteCiiicaluxis aie me same as aDOve er.epi Bi 00-13646 includes 22 amp switch wim a stainless steel stem Et 00-1364 b includes 22 amp switch ary l 10 lent ot stainless steel capillary Typ# Cl00 A F100 . ?/ V s S3J W CLFAFfOMA | bCM(W J * MF O MOCES rtot to ^ V .li i I I ?7 i1-:r ! at' I CiEANfOftl I acoew i 4 MT G HOLES ^ -1 y Modolo 112 A fit 4 hr -- NF1 ' Modot MO ,, 37 te case and wire directly to the switch terjcal and national electrical codes Bring the Irom the rear ol the case allowing enough :t switch movemeni when making setting ad- s ait- supplied, color coding is as follows SPOT Vmlff Bl-ICk Ukie DPDT SWT 1 Violet Black Blue SWT 2 Yellow Red Orange lirtx) (cast in svmoic) is provided and mecis ji the wire as shod as possible lo preveni ptuKp-i arft wlyfi (irOvykxJ tty aUlur.I.ibtc lustments r.lments ano rrvanbralion conned control tun- souice .tnd slap.li/e unil in'- vow -iriiir.iinpni tnsidp onclosuie II 111-.' Inin .a iii.ii Ii-mpi'i.iluii'. adiusl strliilua st'il.iyj linn ity sciew in (clockwise) u turn iy screw oul (counterclockwise) ti*- do not exceed the maximum Icmpera- ith reference scale braled lor maximum accuracy at the mid- locked at any set point using a 3/32 * Alien s located below the index pointer. o desired set point. If the actual temperaature do not agree, turn adjustment screw xtnterclockwtse to lower set temperature Procedures Jctory authorized replacement parts and ' CAPlllARY Modoto !M-t*4 l>ft .c;) 7 HP1' Modols 70I-70A ! i i? f Modolo 3U. m, 374 32 .23.0J MoM* 770. 774 Kinect supply circuits belore temovtng ' D0 a 134899 CONFIDENT! Al- e is the highest temperature to occasionally operated without ilion and repeatability limits staled in literature must :es in the sy'-lem Occasional amperature is acceptable (e g tion should be restricted to the ounimg screws, switch and ch terminal PART II e enclosure and recalibrate per jLMULV (I/Ai nr. upside down (T/A on Top) 100 5 a 7/H' wtcnch ICO `.i MBl Y fT/A, QO ; a i i rft' mimic)i on new T /A bellows ir n Types E100 4 B100 Types C100 4 F100 r i. Slocked models with options. jtr ___ t 4 Immersion Stem node 1s 120 4 121 rijr- iIi l 100 4 B100 C100 & F 100 Dimensions Si r it u, iimonds riii,,ni rtKistderannn o< II*- lutnwirvi lai inf', wiien speC'lying and installing UE lemperalure 11ski aiKl rrtni itenance insiniclions iiinvuted nmst ! read and understood and maximum inmperalu'e limits staled m iiifalute andonnamppi.iies must never DO enceeded even mi mi lupioui pie .mho oi maximum leiufmiaiuie isaccepiame on i limiled Dasis |i e . slad-up leslinq). ir in) lo me d<".in. ill si .lOiusi.ipie i.inue l *ce '.iweyciing ai piool pressure or nvuimum lempeialute - wtieio oaniaae In a primary unit coirkt endani.u lile limp or property A hi O' low lirml switch is necesus runaway rondilion could resull so lhat incorrect inadveileni or main ious seit'igsni any range POini cannot resull in an unsale system ambient terruierature lluclualions win not oanuge unit or alleci opeiation Orient unit so that moistuie im inr.il rtKsi'ill ennrKielion lii'i ,hi(iinniii I .ikimiII UL il iikXJiIk .iIkki is nei essury I signs oi pov.ioie darruge lo unit <.u. n as dull in sei poini Check unit unmedialeiy testing is necessary lor critical apolic ii'ons where damage 10 umi cuuld endanger property or personnel should be tested betore use and on nameplate must nol Peexrei led Overload on a switch can cause damage, possibly on the lirsi i national mei meal codes using win m/p recommended in mslall.ilion sheet 'hi parls and procedures lure exceeding published limits ED ELECTRIC CONTROLS COMPANY ) 0 L STREET WATER! (J W N MASS 02172 U S. A.. * 617/926-1000 TELEX: 092-2445 10M MAP 206 DO A 134900 rONFIDFNTIAL P-SERIES Pressure Switches \ Hf*w to Solocl iv i'. !i -r ACCC' I'- Ci:lii.-;> the switch unit ;> i ill i:.t >m (ini, i* ii ii : i! .< i: How 1.1 r.ili-i:f 1. Select the adjustable operating range based on desired actuation pressure. 2. Check that proof pressure is sufficient. 3. Read across and select the desired P-Series switch unit with the proper enclosure. 4. Continue across and select a matching transducer unit compatible with the fluid. General Purpose Enclosure PA Switch Unit 7nr: PB Switch Unit Watertight Enclosure Single-Stage Adjustable Deadband wets , allow independent adiusimr-n- < trie wr and I icsct points over me lun ') .rwp- <a I Mte Switch The mminnst- difference between set and reset points is me deadband ksted tmlow. It*- maximum j rsttcrencc is the lull range 0> the switch Fra Single-Stage Fixed Deadband units nave an adiustable set point and a rmn-ad|ustable automatic reset point. A Open Frame Specifications Adjustable Deadband Fixed Deadband Adjustable Operating Range <P*fl> Vacuum 0-30* HG Compound 30' Hg-14 psig Pressure 0-4 0-9 2-18 2-18 4-36 6-60 10-100 20-200 30-300 40-400 60-600 100-1000 160-1650 270-2700 600-6000 Proof Pressure (p*`g) 1 Adjustable j Oeadband Maixnum Fun Scale Minimum At Mid-Range (pMfli 1 Open Frame Catalog Mo 50 50 60 60 60 100 150 150 200 400 450 500 2000 2000 5000 5000 9000 4*Hg 6*Hg w. 1.2 1.8 2.5 4.0 5.4 9 18 27 36 54 90 250 300 650 PA3CA PA26A PA36A PA26A PA36A PA26A PA16A PA16A PA16A PA16A PA16A PA26A PA16A PA26A PA16A PA16A Fetniw WsWrpgM tnriotin 1 1I | Fixed 1 1 Deadband Open Frame Catalog Mo Catalog Mo | Mid-Range Catalog ! (psig) > No. I'A.TOA PA20A -- PA30A PA20A PA30A PA20A PA10A PA10A PA10A PA10A PA10A PA20A PA10A PA20A PA10A PA10A PA31B PA21B -- PA31B PA21B PA31B PA21B PA11B PA11B PA11B PA11B PA11B PA21B PA11B PA21B PA11B PA11B 1*Hg PB36A 1'Hg PB26A 0.05 PB46A 0.4 PB36A 0.4 PB26A 0.6 PB36A 0.7 PB26A 0.9 PB16A 1.5 PB16A 3.0 PB16A 5.0 PB16A 6 PB16A 12 PB26A 15 PB16A 100 PB26A 125 PB16A 200 PB16A Gen rat Watertight Purpose Enel sura Catalog No. Catalog No. PB30A PB20A PB40A PB30A PB20A PB30A PB20A PB10A PB10A PB10A PB10A PB10A PB20A PB10A PB20A PB10A PB10A PB31B PB21B PB41B PB31B PB21B PB31B PB21B PB11B PB11B PB11B PB11B PB11B PB21B PB11B PB21B PB11B PB11B All :,lVlli : ` '1 ill V 1 HE . I 1 it- 1. ` 11'/1 `1 Values shown are nominal. > Rated prool pressure on RF10A71 is 150 psig and on RG10A71 is 300 psig 10 DO A 134901 CONFIDENTIAL * AStA Tr^pSinT t 11. ! -- Simply order the switch and transducer unit by catalog number joined by a slash (/), e.g., PA36A/RD30A11. i iH<i .r.-iiii*i <1 -- Simply order the switch and transducer unit separately by individual catalog number, e.g., one PA36A and one RD30A11. O/if/i'n- -- Add appropriate suffix for desired option (see pages 34-35). u,<t,; The third digit of each of the catalog numbers must be identical e.g., PA13I6A and RD(3j0A11. : Select transducer unit below PC Switch Unit Two-Stage Fixed Deadband units consist ol two separate snap-action switcnes. each with an mdepeno entfy adtustabte set pomt and adjustable reset point The (Site*cnee between tne sot ana reset points of each sweeh a the deadband SMed betow the mmmum aherence between the set [rants of the two Switches s tne separation Open Frame Standard connection Is 1/4* NPT inotional i/3* MPT add suffu *B* to catalog number) Transducer Unit f ' w gauge pressure type transducers provide lor one < .wae cormrcwi' ei ttc bottom of the transducer. T'**v a>e (hapreatpup^tun type transducers using an t kiMtane* ei contact witti the fluid, backed by a piston * iw*jn Trev aBuw. tsgli sensitivity lor low pressures and regh pressures Two-Stage Fixed Deadband Transducer Units Separation Fixed At Ma Range tpmg) Maienum Full Scale Wwumum At Mid-Range (pug) ' Open Frame Catalog Mo General Watertight Purpose tnclMil* Catalog Mo Catalog No A* or Ce* N*w" A lev *N* Catalog Mu Ae Odor Gas Water, Air, Oil or Gaa Aluminum S Braas A Suns"** Buna *N" Catalog No Catalog No. Corrosive Fluids All 316 SS 316 SS 4 VUon Catalog No. Catalog No. 2 THg 3`Hg PC36A PC30A PC31B t RV34A11 RV34A21 -- RV34A32 4.3*Hg * 0.6 0.8 1.2 2.0 2.4 4 8 12 16 30 40 200 250 400 6`Hg -- 1.0 1.8 1.8 3.6 6.0 10 20 30 40 60 100 300 400 600 PC26A __ PC36A PC26A PC3GA PC26A PC16A PC16A PC16A PC16A PC16A PC26A PC16A PC26A PC16A PC16A PC20A _ PC30A PC20A PC30A PC20A PC10A PC10A PC10A PC10A PC10A PC20A PC10A PC20A PC10A PClOA PC21B PC31B PC21U PC31U PC21B PCI IB PCI IB PCI lB PC11B PCI IB PC21B PCI IB PC21B PCI IB PCI IB I t j RD40A71 | R030A71 | RD20A71 i *** 1 RE20A71 | RE10A71 RF10A71 RG10A71 ,; -- |i |-- -- -- -- " RV24A11 RD40A11 RD30A11 RD20A11 RE20A11 RE10A11 RF10A11 RG10A11 RH10A11 RJ10A11 -- -- -- -- RV24A21 RD40A21 RD30A21 RD20A21 -- RE20A21 RE10A21 RF10A21 RG10A21 RH10A21 RJ10A21 RL20A21 RL10A21 RN20821 RN10B21 -- -- -- a*. -- RE30A44 RE20A44 RE10A44 RF10A44 RG10A44 RH10A44 RJ10A44 -- -- -- -- -- RV24A32 RD40A42 RD30A42 R020A42 -- RE20A42 RE10A42 RF10A42 RG10A42 RH10A42 RJ10A42 RL20A42 RL10A42 RN20B42 RN10B42 RQ10B42 >il* . ; 'ii r.inck fur iniiiH'tlinlp rJolivorv. i}> 316 $S transducer deadbands are approx. 50% greater than listed. Transducers ending m 32 have 303 SS process connection, not 316 SS. DO A 1.3490? CONFIDENTIAL,. ASCATRifpSiN Enclosures ASCO TRI-POINT switches are available in either a general purpose or watertight enclosure, in addition to open frame construction. These enclosed units are made in accordance with NEMA and UL standards. These standards define the protection level an enclosure gives and the tests it must pass to meet a particular design. General purpose -- Type 1. These enclosures are designed for indoor use to protect personnel from accidental contact with the equipment. P-Series gen eral purpose enclosures are painted, zinc-coated steel and have a 7/8* diameter hole at the top for electrical entry. Watertight -- Type 4. Watertight and dust-tight enclosures are intended for use indoors and outdoors to protect the enclosed equipment against splashing or falling water, windblown dust and water, hose directed water, and severe external condensation. P-Series watertight switch enclosures are epoxy-painted, zinccoated steel with a 1/2* conduit hub in the side of the lower housing for electrical entry. (For optional 316 SS watertight enclosure see page 13.i Dimensions (inches) DO A 134903 CONFTDFNTTAL Filtration LHA Specifications Stainless steel mesh Re-usable Epoxy bonded joints for compatibility with all fluids Rugged steel inner support - Nickel plated steel end caps Options Custom sizes with 60 and 200 mesh screens arc available upon request No by-pass or 3 psi by-pass available <RV3i 1.16 C.tfai3Q2(.-1 #/- Suction Strainers 100 Mesh-- 140 Micron SEH Series i Bypassy loptnnal) 07 06 Oi ITj =* 5 _ o> 03 <r 02 10 20 30 40 50 GO !Z GO 100 110 120 GPM Ordering Information Metal Hex Model Number Nominal Flow GPM L/min *SEH 3-%-100 3 11 SEH 5-&-100 5 19 SEH 8-34-100 8 31 SEH 10-1-100 10 38 SEH 20-134-100 20 88 SEH 30-1)4-100 30 120 SEH 50-1 Vfr-100 50 198 SEH 50-2-100 50 198 SEH 75-2)4-100 75 283 SEH 100-3-100 100 To Specify By-Pass Option Add -RV3 379 * CM Port (NPT.) V *7* V r iv IV IV 2* 3* Filter Area tal cm7 34 220 62 -100 62 400 110 710 162 1050 225 1450 340 2190 340 2190 400 2580 500 3230 Weight lbs. kg. 0.3 0.14 0.5 0.23 0.5 0.23 0.7 0.32 1.0 0.45 U 0.54 1.4 0.82 1.8 0.82 2.3 1.04 3.0 1.36 03 aa Dimensions A In. mm in. 2.5 64 1.9 48 3.1 78 2.6 67 3.5 89 2.6 67 5.4 136 2.6 67 6.9 174 3.4 86 8.1 204 10.0 225 3.4 3.9 86 100 10.0 225 3.9 100 10.1 257 5.1 130 11.8 298 5.1 130 *By-pass not available on this model. DO A 134904 OONFTDFNTTAL PIPING HOOK-UP American Industrial . (. .. Heat Transfer Inc. SINGLE PASS TWO PASS Unit Coding Model: AB -120-4 Standard Construction ____ Snell Diameter _______ i | j Effective TuOe Length _______ j C4 - TP i: i i 'I I ------ Tuoe So* Pauet .____ Cooling TuOe Diameter -- Baft>e Soaong FOUR PASS A .. .Hot fluid to be cooled B ..................Cooled fluid C ..... Cooling water o D ..... Cooeng water out SP.................. Smgie Pass TP..................... Two Pass FP..................... Four Pass INSTALLATION: Tne following steps should be taken at the time of installation m oroer to insure maximum efficiency and long lasting use of the Heat Exchanger. 1 Connect the hot fluid (and most viscous fluid) lines and the cooling water lines in accoroance with the piping instructions above. 2 It the source of cooling water is from other than a municipal water suooty it a recommended that water strainers be installed ahead of the cooler. m order that dirt and debris may not enter cooler and pug tne water passages 3 When an automatic water regulating valve is used, place it on tne inlet end of the neat excnanger Arrange the water outlet piping so that the cooler remains flooded with water, but at little or no pressure 4 To protect the Heat Exchanger from high flow and pressure surges of hot fluids, a fast acting relief valve or a bypass check valve may be installed in tne inlet line to the cooler. Note: A For steam service-single pass heat exchangers should be used, pressure of 75 psi (maximum) and temperatures to 350F (maximum). Vertical mounting is recom mended. If mounted horizontal a slight pitch is recommended to permit condensation drainage. B As an option, all models are offered with 90/10 copper/nickel or stainless steel tubing, brass end bonnets and SAE ports. Table A - Flow Rate for Shell & Tube Side Shell Dia. Code 400 Maximum liquid flow - Shell side Baffle Spacing ABCDE 10 - - - - Liquid flow - Tube side SP TP FP Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. 3.5 28 - - - - 700 17 29 30 - - 9 71 4.5 30 2.2 17 1000 24 48 68 70 - 20 120 10 70 5.0 30 1200 28 56 100 110 120 30 250 15 120 7.5 60 1600 38 70 150 200 220 57 460 29 180 14 115 DO A 104905 OONFTDFNTTAL Copynght 1990 American industrial Heat Transfer. Inc. PERFORMANCE ,Aadtaa^H!SS1^L Sizing Notes: 1) Curves based on 40F approach temperature. Example: oil leaving cooler at 125F using 85 F cooling water (125 - 85 = 40). 2) The oil to water ratio of 1:1 or 2:1 means that for every gallon of oil circulated, a minimum of 1 or Vi gallon (respectively) of 85 F water must be circu lated to obtain the curve results. 3) Curve performance based on oil with an average viscosity of 100 SSU. 4) Oil pressure drop coding: = 5 psi; = 10 psi; = 20 psi. Curves having no pressure drop code symbol means that the oil pressure drop is less than 5 psi to the maximum recommended flow rate for that model cooler. 5) Corrections for approach temperatures: H.P. H.P. curve x /Actual Approach\ \ 40 / HEAT ENERGY DISSIPATION RATES (Basic Stock Model) 600 500 400 300 no HORSEPOW ER REMOVED IN COOLER 100 10 GO 50 40 OiirWaier Ratio 1 AB-401 A4 SP 1 1 30 p AH-402 Aa SP 1 1 3 ah 7rn-AA ip I 1 .1 AH /HI III. 1 I1 :* i ! All /U1-C6-TP 2 1 20 6 AB 702 A4 TP 1 1 7 AB-702-B4-FP 2 1 B AB-702 C6 TP 2 i 9 AB-703-A4-TP 1 1 10 AB-7Q3B4-FP 2 1 11 AB-I002 C4-TP 2 1 10 12 AB-I002-C6-TP 2 1 13 AB-1003-B4-FP 2 i 14 AB-1003-C4-TP 2 1 8 IS A8-1003-C6-TP 2 1 16 AB-1004-C4-TP 2 1 6 17 AB-1004-C6-TP 2 1 18 AB-1202 A4FP 11 5 19 AB-1202-C4-F P 2 1 20 AB-1204-A4-FP 1.1 4 21 AB-1204-C4-FP 2 1 22 AB-1206-D4-FP 2-1 23 AB-1602-A4-FP 1 1 3 24 AB-1602-C4-FP 2:1 25 AB-1604-B4-FP 2.1 26 AB-1604-D4-FP 2 1 27 AB-1606-C4-FP 2-1 2 28 AB-1606-D4-FP 2 1 29. AB-1608-C4-FP 2:1 30 AB-1608-D4-FP 2 1 cO^OF^ 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 150 200 GPM OIL THROUGH COOLER- and Weights: STANDARD MODELS SINGLE PASS MODEL AABS--4*0012 M N NPFT MOPT 21D1 2244 1.01 _ in AAABSS-T77O0032t 231213..444777 3^4 JwO 140 AAASBS-tO1100Q00Z40 342213...600000 4.06 JHO) 240 AAAAAAASSSSfSSt---<111111272222200000005640372 2340073402102--....2211319$$2262 4J0 4M0) 340 AAAAAAASSSSOSS--*---1l1111f0l0000O000000OZS307 hM42307140030.t0060022t2222 0-02 4(401 440 (2 each end) P- M -N- TWO PASS 0 tflOOCl AASS A402t AAASS 177000123 AS aAsS *i*c00o00n2* AAAAAAA#MSSSSS* t1****7 1IS**A1#** AAAASSSS aAASSs **MA*t4o40VSSInS1*I yN __ -- 231123 222000 330 223 20 ) 41 20 4O2tP*1i660AS4A n**At n 4P1i *11000 i1*mt? t*1*o000 000 MpPT MOPT __ ---- (320) 1 00 (3711 110 (9210 700 <970i 210 A -- m t to 1 44 FOUR I ASS P -S-S STANDARD DIMENSIONS (In Inches) yootl AS*4Qt AS-40? AB 701 AS-7Q2 AB'703 AB-100? AB 1003 A6-l00i AB 1?0? AS-1703 A0.1204 AB 1200 AS 1206 AS 1207 AB-1206 AS 1002 AS-1003 AS. 1004 AB-1605 AS 1006 Aft. 1607 AB <006 J4 A 6 C 0 E F G M MPT MPT L. 702 it 06 2 125 10 02 310 70 06 1 94 2 6? ON 41 Ota -- 50 1 72 700 1? 30 (?) 3656 10 00 62$ 21 36 3 62 92$ 1 50 44 X 1 00 .30 25 00 30 36 100 2M 11 SO 21 6? (6) $ 125 2* 50 736 30 62 400 0 79 200 44m 1 00 30 33 50 30 6? 110 300 6 125 U62 23 50 32 30 41 36 90 50 50 50 00 30 21 50 30 34 y* 25 061 40 25 4 7$ 57 30 66 30 75 2$ <) 790 2 50 44 X M 30 200 344 1360 27 36 3290 31 30 31 60 40 36 (0) 00 40 60 12 13 49 30 650 02 350 44 X 1 00 30 4160 96 36 50 60 07 36 67 60 76 36 3.00 43* MOOt I AS-S11 AO 4Q2 p0 M M MPT MPT s 9 _ ------ - --- -- -- -- AS 701 1347 r AS 702 0 47 324 30 71 02 m AS 703 9< 47 AS *007 ri5 o AS WQ1 211 406 36 1 00 71 1 34 AS OlH 41 1$ ' AS 1207 2 4 AS 1700 S 31 (21 AS 1201 42 if 30 AS iTVi 91 14 460 1 10 1 12 1 40 AS iTfT* 40 31 IM Aft 120/ 04 .11 90 AS 12CS 70 if AS 1002 20 06 AS-1003 30 06 AS ion* 44 M O) AS 1409 13 06 it 10 200 1 30 100 AS 1400 07 00 AS 1607 71 60 AS 1000 00 00 DO A 134907 CONFIDENTIAL WEIGHT (LBS) 7 10 )7 2$ 30 40 SO 00 55 70 90 110 130 110 170 105 140 206 24$ ZM 270 290 MOOEL AB-401 AS-102 AS 701 AS 70? A*-703 Aston AS 1003 AS 1004 AS'202 AS 1703 AS 1204 AS <709 AS <706 AS1207 AS 1209 A0-1MZ AS1603 AS1604 AS 1006 AS1007 AS 1000 ZINC annode available -- as optional extra MOTE: W* iwnrlii npi C19fliMmQMff* ifhflVhlMmMAOiM4cmff. I^  Th rmostatic COOLING CONTROL valve Built for the most rugged machine tool and hydraulic applications Six temperatur rang s to meet your requirements Quick response to temperature changes Extra heavy-duty direct-acting h allows for longer service BULLETIN 560 STERLCO HH i-T TEMPERATURE ACTUATED L REGULATING VALVE The Type 56-T Valve gives smo. )ih regulation ol water and other fluids not harmful to hr;it;s It's designed tor the most rugged applications hydraulic power package equipment, hydraulic presses and plastic molding equipment... anywhere reliability in temperature control is demanded Speedy the Sierlco Type 56-T Vdvo in any one ol -.>* temperature ranges from 40f in;'75f It can he adiusiod lor opening at any pomi within the temperature range selected A - ample turn ol inn tXJltom adiusting cup accompi .hes ihe aniusim. -m The 56 T is a better designed p-oduct that won t le.p or chatter To insure dcpendnb-niy pvery v.-iivcfactory icr.lcd Ihror timpt.in Odi -reul temtv'f.iiu'i bnihr, I xtra podormanen can I x- cxiicciod ol n hnilfrws also They an-dii<*ri a luui wiih sturdy t. i' and ihe spring is /me coaled i.i.vi Sl.iinte*'.'. si*' tie.ifl'. mean extra years rd ser\ *--Iicchix*U' ol i rtrj'.l.mr e In tin-pmr.ivu i-Muci- >1 wire di.iwinp OIIm.-i lealuros inclurlc a Hun.i ' J .iidiv r?n m> in nny position and manual tin hinri SPECIFICATIONS Sizes Fluid pressure range Stenderd temperature ranges Body Velve parts Standard capillary length Standard bulbs X". '// . 1" FPT up to i ?r> nsi (Opening point artiustmeni ni v lx.anywliiiii- within ihe turn I.ml hinges Shown ) 'll) -- 100" F., liO I-10 F.. 100- 17!.- F,, 125 -- 2ix> r , 140- ?-1<>- F.. 200 -- 7/1 l Brass .illny casting Brass illny 6 ft. Fur other lengths avj.i.il.ie consult factory For H" anrt valve sires x r*- with union connection For %" inti I" valve sires V," x (s*i** with `t~ union rnniv . linns Special bulbs Standard bulb mounting Seat disc Seat bead Valve mounting Temperature adjustment All valv.- sires: t 3'^ won union connection, ty- : 6'*' wen 1 .** union connection Available im mne quannly others. consult taclnty %" union Buna-N - replaceable Stainless Steel -- rpni.ia.- it>i< Any p.isihnn To ad|usi lor lower tempeutun.-, turn adiusting cup coumetclockwtse. To adiust (or higher temperautru. turn ait|usnng cup clockwise. SMm Slid hii Wads Itul NltilMid Nr Copper alloy BT i AiflW'PUial. double- braided copper capitaif DbiMi biom* two-ply bdlowi 0Ody Mid voto* putt Mt* IpPOPl MOSt pMoy PromiM (or Miy nuivii floshiN| after msUHohon ZfNC-Ctt04 | ptd tpr*At D0 A 134908 confidential STERLCO 56-T TEMPERATURE ACTUATED REGULATING VALVE Note the excellent flow characteristics of the Type 56-T V FLOW CHART Wittr Pruur Drop Acrott Vlv p* vKEcror>MK=- Vi" FLOW CHART Water Prniurt Drop Aero** VaWa pi %" flow chart Water Preiture Orojt Aero** Valve p*i 1" FLOW CHART Water Prenvrt Drop Across Valve p< ADJUSTMENT AND SERVICING To decrease (low or raise temperature (reduce water consumption) turn adiusting cup clockwise. To increase (low 01 lower temperature turn ad* lusting cup counteiclockwise. Alter making adlustment give the regulator time to adjust itself against temperature change. To remove adjust ing cup remove retainer ring. The Type 56-T valve may be flushed manually after installation to remove dirt and grit from the line. To flush valve, place sturdy screwdriver on top of push plate and sprint* assembly. (Opening in lower housing provides ample room to insert screw driver). Compress and release spring assembly several times. ORDERING INFORMATION Slock Nvmbtr Slzo 505 ~ H* SOS________________ /,- 507_________________ soa r* Sterling, rnc 5200 WEST CLINTON AVE PO BOX 23435 MILWAUKEE. W1S 53223 Phone 414.354-0970 Telei 2-6805 inLilho U.S-A. 10-84 DO A 134909 CONFIDENTIAL INSTALLATION AND OPERATION STERLCO TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVES HANDLE GENTLY! OPERATION Tenq>crature control valves an: instruments. not pipe fittings- A dent in the Itody or a sharp Item! in the ejptllury may prevent lh**m from operating. Don't use pipe wrendn*?*. Iki not Muhjcrl ciHilrnlo lo walerdianuncr coiiditiniw or oxn^ivo prcsstiiev BULB LOCATION This perhaps the mwt important (actor in good installation. The entire bulb, not just purl n( it, must lx* f*X|K*cd to tin: fluid of which tin* lcni|era* lure Is to lx* controlled. Jn n circulating sy^irin, the bull) must lx* directly in the lint* of How. In a tank, it mut Ik? in a representative location. not in a eurnci sluci\ may l*e w armer or cooler than I It** rcM of llic tank. Tin* Irinperalim- at llii* ImiIIi w tinonly one winch c.m lr roiitrollcil Remember that this is a modulating control. It does not alternately open wide and shut tight like an electrical control device. It opens gradually wider and wilier, in relation to tile difference between the actual bulb temperature and the bulb temperature at which tlic valve is closed. In normal operation, the control valve remains in a constant, partially open position which is automatically adjusted whenever conditions require it. MAINTENANCE j The only servicing normally required is to keep the control clean. The valve can be inspected and cleaned by arrrs* through the inlet and outlet, without disassembly. The Imlli must not become *iuilcd with any sulisiartcc which interferes with the irstn'iitisMiin of heat. BULB WELLS SloMlM In M'K*d wll*`tl HTll* (| ! |H> (Mil oi !* iritim c (ht Imlli nilluMii ill jtimt; it** Ml "1**111 i *nL VALVE LOCATION (HEATING OR DIRECT ACTING CONTROL) In *>it|*|*1 \ Ini* i i*> mh t It It* I* *, *1111 ,i|u u- .1 Ni l l * l!>*l mv.I IIm.hh. ii*. Hap ;ti do i Mini* u*-.it* (Mill* i li**m il* L jun. **1**11* Mlt'lll | Sl(t I MlM.lll lit* I OttlHtl #1 |l* I IHI)| l| salt- oiill* t. wain-11.1101111*1 **1 |****, *h**i**I w** *-il* VALVE LOCATION (COOLING OR REVERSE ACTING CONIROU II repan* arc mwilril, nr iccommcitd that these ron- 1 *!* Iw rcitmi*-i| I** nur lueinry for reconditioning, Millnl wiifkiHcn. with pro|*r louts, replacement and fa* ilute*. will *|o a good |oh more tinM*4itti jlh lluii if rai* In- *Jonc in the held. Tbc*c iwMutk jr Miaiplr In ili^ywetiihir and nwoiililr for a p o*Mi who w hstilui with them. Ilul an inc- I* **f** * *1 w*k**i will wMiKiiiitf** ilaniagr tJ>mi by *f* *** 1*11 handling And mally replacement part*, whwl* a**` Nl available an tlte field. will he required If l** no re*m at 1* o'rwary la* ihsa*^-mhb w* *l ilw fitotiidv I'kiv write lor ilrtiilol * wUi diaw**g% and miiImkIhmiv 1 It a *M*ir*J lta*> lo Iw* reiyfiM-il lor iriinn, iihiw *II ih a* mu* h !* |wwil*l* i al**ut wltai api**4*% (* la* ***!.-. and a|*f it "o e" willmul *l*^jw-mhhrs * i**J |aai|iU damaciiig c*"l |*art*> lh* will help *p *. t*. il** UnI and NM^i ff'iHOMiiif .il w*i*L. an<| n* #!*** lw*w to ittMil (oillet irmihh*. t .ln** to tb*` 1 ihiIiii^ ripnpiM* ii \L I* * I* a (.*. ,1. 111 .1 lent rxch.nigri. t.ihc li.**tl.l l- il* *.**li_ TROUBLE-SHOOTING wain oiiih'l line r.ilfi't tli.n* it** *w, rt |**~ 11% keep*. the c\di,ingcr till* I witii w #* * *! (* **< I ||r C* Hi I lol 11 old Im'HI^ nil......... I Im **** * . * .**" . I fiMilmi: ujli'i lt-in|M (.Hint VALVE POSITION I'ltlci.iiti) w a 111 .*! | ii-s-l 111^ "* * * 41 ** -#*.** .. itl It tl* **ii11 ol dm lint ap|'**i lit !** httlding l-ni|*-ia *w*^> U.nh, ni d not enough Iw-ating nr rrmlmg e 4u i**-d. Iit%i r||*-* k h*r ctlnnal rnndilMiiw w|ihI w*i tint lie riHidul limn Ofieratmg co<fV|t> I i4Ht|*|r, are. h*w or fluctuating gram or w$tei *w*ltdt pif^ur* . iLmugeil 01 olKlruete*! i*Iwh. lra|*. *ii*M*n* *r oilier kiwi*fi*-*; sn|ipl) piping Ion m^ll. dull luilh nr |i*wr hull* location. lit* n*r<| m it*1 \ ullirr |m*-iIm*h |l J #* 1 f*i>llnt ton dnwmt.tid (mm s,il\<r )*oh. \|i *4)** 1^.1**^ hn\r ,ifii.H vtlMOlli" t)lf`> linn *l |L.b |l t) hackuunl, they will |c nni*>) *n *--* .in* It tl*e ulie will 1*tt (Iim*. rherk for dirt or foreign *H' r Iw-twecn *h***' and wat. The \aivr can lie ie*| through the inlet and nutlet r openings withmit di^awnthly, and ran usually be cleaned out with an an Imm-. CAPILLARY LOCATION N11I Mr\l to ;| ilt'lllll lllir oi lit | * **J I *A*tl It tlir t iipillni) 1*. c\|Hs**il to i-vIri'Oi* | w*f *! . * urns he iltMi.ililp to wi.ip it with iiomLim, wit* ml STRAINERS A Neilco L*II ^ or |H.^ .StiniiH* *lb*Hl*l I* tiMiillrd ptst nhiMif nl each muiIm*I t*!** |m pmi* * 1 it from huge particle'* ot tint. Ao*( lie *%*i*i iimh II *oeih-a|ing result" a diri*ci<acting (heat* My t tjlvr wia>" o|im or a rrvrre*nr|inR (cooling > %ale "tiiyw rIrated regardle^ of tlir iem|ieraiurr * j| llie hulti. tlte tltertnnwlai may have loM its fill 40*1 I**-* nine inopfraiitr. To rltirk lh, remove tah" anti bull* from the line, *ct the control at 4lf*Mif ill** tnifhlle ol the range, and insert the bulb in n,itfi hotter limn the maximum of the range. If the dir*f t-ae|tng control dor* not dose or the re- veru'-arimg' control tlitrs not open, factory repairs# to the thermostat are required. ` Ih* kept fire of -cilillteiil, se.ih . **t* ADJUSTMENT isp.If there tv a leak lo the exteiior of llw l*oly. some p.ul may Ite lora*e or partially disassembled. Other w a seal bellows may In* damaged requiring 1 rtupeijtm** ailpislmcni, within the ijog** *f tin* factory replacement. control, is made hy simply turmii^ an adjusting crew in (he direction indicated on fie valte !*>dv nr nameplate. Turn the screw only a little at a lime, If the valve diallers, this usually means a loose or disassembled interior part Chattering is sometimes caused by other devices near the control, snd can then let temperature* reach equilibrium liefnre ad* sometimes lie eliminated by changing piping arrange* jiMing further. uirnts, valve position, or aupply pressure. , j. A ,S()HH I I l 1 t i tr. in *i 71 DO A 134910 CONFIDENTIAL STERLING, INC., MILWAUKEE, WIS. Ord ring Information CMIJcZe- -L. 4* ro S ri R Relief, Pilot Operated Valves, Pressure Control VALVE R6P R6V R6S R10P R10M RIOS WEIGHT 9 LBS. <4.0 Kg) 15 LBS. (6.8 Kg) 9 LBS. <4.0 Kg) 17 LBS. <7.7 Kg) 21 LBS. (9.5 Kg) 17 LBS. (7.7 Kg) E RELIEF VALVE SUBPLATE MOUNTED RELIEF VALVE Hydraulic Valve Divisi n Elyria, Ohio 44035 INLINE MOUNTED RELIEF VALVE USING VENT CONNECTION DO A 134911 CONFIDENTIAL Installation Information Pressure Control Valves FOR MAXIMUM VALVE RELIABILITY, ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATION INFORMATION. The following is important installation information which applies to all pressure control valves. MOUNTING R2P Series valves are inline and panel mounted. The UR Series valves are offered in the subplate mounted versions only. All other pressure control valves are in-line, and subplate mounted. Subplates are designed to NFPA standards. The valves will operate mounted in any position (i.e., vertically, horizontally, etc.). For subplate mounted valves see installation information "Recommended Mounting Surface". FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS Premium Quality hydraulic oil with a viscosity range between 150*250 SSU (32-54 cst.) at 100F (38 C). Normal operating viscosity range between 80-1000 SSU (16*220 cst.). Oil should have maximum anti-wear properties and rust and oxidation treatment. FLUIDS AND SEALS Valves using synthetic, fire-resistant fluids require special seals. When phosphate esters or its blends are used -- VITON seals are required. Water-glycol, water-in-oil emulsions, and petroleum oils may be used with STANDARD SEALS. FILTRATION For maximum valve and system component life, the system should be protected from contami nation at a level not to exceed 125 particles greater than 10 microns per milliliter of fluid (SAE Class 4/ISO 16/13). SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS Consult your Parker representative for any application requiring the following: Pressure above rated. Fluid other than those specified. Oil temperature above 160F. (71.1C.). MOUNTING PATTERNS Size* NFPA 3 (3/8") P03 6 (3/4") P06 10 (1-1/4") P10 Refers to models PR3, PR6, PR10 etc. for B, S, ULR Series. R Series reliefs meet the industry standard pattern. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS The recommended torque values are for the bolts which mount the valve to the mounting surface are as follows: Size* Torque 3 (3/8") 6 (3/4*) 25 Ft. Lbs. 25 Ft. Lbs. 10 (1-1/4*) 45 Ft. Lbs. Refers to models PR3, PR6. PR10 etc. for R, B, S. ULR. and UR Series. PILOT CAP ROTATION Series R, PR, S, ULR valve pilot caps come with adjusting knob positioned as shown on dimension pages, but can be turned 90, 180, or 270 to accommodate space requirements. (3/8" and 3/4" sizes only) NOTE: B Series valve pilot cap assembly is positioned as shown on dimension pages. The pilot cap assembly cannot be rotated to accommodate space requirements. 27o rT;;T j*o VALVE ADJUSTMENT All pressure control valves may be adjusted by loosening the jam nut (shown on dimension pages) and rotating the adjusting knob. Turn knob clockwise (CW) to increase pressure, counter clockwise (CCW) to decrease pressure. After adjustment, hold knob and retighten jam nut. For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpow r Motion ft CnntrAi DO A 134917 OONFT DFNTT AL Installation Information Pr ssure Control Valves FOR MAXIMUM VALVE RELIABILITY, ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING INSTALLATION INFORMATION. The following is important installation information which applies to specific valve series or types. SERIES R2P, DIRECT OPERATED RELIEF VALVES TANK LINE The tank line of these valves should be connected directly to the tank, terminating below the oil level. Any pressure in the tank line will affect valve operation. REMOTE OPERATOR R2P Series direct operated valves are identical in peration to the pilot stage of a pilot operated relief valve. When the direct operated relief valve is used as a remote operator for a pilot operated relief valve, pipe the direct operated valve to the vent line of the pilot operated valve as shown in the following diagram: during the idle portion of the machine cycle is desirable in reducing heat. REMOTE CONTROL When using remote control, the main valve should be set 150 PSI higher than the remote pilot setting. VALVE SETTING To conserve energy and reduce stress on system components, the relief valve should be set as low as possible. A good general rule is to set it 150 PSI above calculated system pressure. Valve adjustment knobs are factory set at 100 PSI above maximum pressure ordered. Once installed, the valve cannot be adjusted past the point of maximum pressure, thus ensuring system component protection against damage due to over-adjustment: NOTE: This design feature should be considered when specifying valve adjustment range. SET AT 1000 PS! The remote operator can only control up to the setting of the pilot valve in the main valve. The remote operator in the diagram would not be effective once it passes a setting of 1000 PSI. To be the controlling pilot, the remote operator must always be set lower than the main pilot. VALVE SETTING To conserve energy and reduce stress on system component, the relief valve should be set as low as possible. A good general rule is to set it 150 PSI above calculated system pressure. SERIES R, PILOT OPERATED RELIEF VALVES TANK LINE The tank line of these valves should be connected directly to tank, terminating below the oil level. Any pressure in the tank line will affect valve operation. Tank pressure should never exceed system pressure. VENTING Connecting the vent port to tank allows the relief valve to divert flow at minimum pressure. Venting SERIES PR. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES VENTING Connecting the vent port to tank allows the reducing valve to go to minimum setting. Since there is usually a pressure differential between inlet and outlet of a pressure reducing valve, heat is generated as fluid passes through the valve (main and drain flow). Heat must be dissipated by the system or with a heat exchanger. DRAIN LINES The drain line of a pressure reducing valve should be connected directly to tank (normal operation) terminating below the oil level. Any pressure in the drain line is additive to the valve setting. In special applications, pressurizing or restricting the drain can be helpful. If, for example, full pressure is applied to the drain, the reducing valve is locked open and there is no reduction in pressure. In some instances such valve action may be desirable, however, always exercise caution when using the product in applications that are unusual or outside the range of normal usage. Drain line pressure on PR6M and 3M is limited to 1000 PSI. E VALVE SETTING All secondary pressure controls (reducing valves) should be set a minimum of 150 PSI below system primary pressure controls (relief valves) to minimize the possibility of valve interaction and instability. Hydraulic Valve Divisi n Elyria, Ohio 44035 DO A 134913 CONFIDENTIAL Motion & Control 145 Installation Information Pressure Control Valves SERIES PR, PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (com.) REMOTE CONTROL Remote pilot operation of a pressure reducing valve is illustrated in the following diagram: When the pressure reducing valve is remote controlled, the adjustment on the main valve should be set 150 PS! higher than the setting on the remote pilot. SERIES B, COUNTERBALANCE VALVES________ DRAIN All counterbalance valves are internally drained. AUXILIARY REMOTE PILOT The 1*1/4" B Series counterbalance valve has an auxiliary pilot port which will open the valve at low pressure. The low pressure override feature can be advantageous in certain applications. Pressure required at the auxiliary remote pilot port is 1/10 that of the normal setting on H, F and M range, end 1/5 on B range. The low-pressure override option is not available on L and Z ranges. HORSEPOWER LOSS Counterbalance valves have a pressure differential between inlet and outlet, therefore, heat is generated by fluid flow through the valve (main and drain flow). This heat must be dissipated by the system or with a heat exchanger. VALVE SETTING Counterbalance valves should be set slightly higher than the pressure required to stabalize the load e.g., if 500 PSI is required to lift a given load, a counterbalance pressure setting of 550 to 600 PSI will be sufficient to balance the load. terminating below the oil level. Any pressure in the drain line is additive to the valve setting. In special applications, pressurizing or restricting the drain can be helpful. If, for example, full pressure is applied to the drain, the sequence valve is locked in the closed position. In some instances such valve action may be desirable, however, always exercise caution when using the product in applications that are unusual or outside the range of normal usage. Drain line pressure on 3M and 6M limited to 1000 PSI. HORSEPOWER LOSS Sequence valves usually have a pressure differential between inlet and outlet, therefore heat is generated by fluid flow through the valve (main and drain flow). This heat must be dissipated by the system or with a heat exchanger. VALVE SETTING All secondary pressure controls (sequence valves) should be set a minimum of 150 PSI below system primary pressure controls (relief valves) to minimize the possibility of valve interaction and instability. SERIES UR. UNLOADING RELIEF VALVES DRAIN LINE The drain line of these valves should be connected directly to tank, terminating below the oil level. Any pressure m the drain line will affect valve operation. VALVE SETTING UR Series valves should be set 15% higher on *'H" style and 30% higher on "M" style than minimum system pressure required. Thus, even at cut-in pressure, the system will always be properly pressurized. SERIES S, SEQUENCE VALVES_______________ DRAIN LINE The drain line of S Series sequence valves must be connected directly to tank (normal operation) ACCUMULATOR CIRCUIT - TYPICAL INSTALLATION For additional information - call your local do *11**1* 146 Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. C0NF | MECHANICAL FLOAT MATERIAL ALL STAINLESS STEEL. HI TECH PLASMA WELDED STEM AND THREADS ALL STAINLESS STEEL. WELDED HEX OPERATING TEMP. -40 F. TO 250 E (OPTION -60 F/TO 300 F.) PRESSURE HATING | SPECIFIC GRAVITY TO 300 PSI IN LIQUID OR COMPRESSED AIR 0.75 - OPTION OS j LEVEL REPEATABILITY | ENCAPSULATION 0.01 INCH "RESIN" - HERMETICALLY SEALED WIRE AND CONTACTS PLATING NONE - HIGH POLISH ONLY ELECTRIC DATA -- REED SWITCH PER UL NO. FIL-E-70063 OPERATING VOLTAGE .1 TO 300 VOLTS AC OR DC CONTACTING FIATING * 50 VA MAX MAX. SWITCH CURRENT * .5 AMPS AC O i DC MAX. CARRY CURRENT AMPS AC < H I'.. OlELECTfUC STRLNGiH^ 00.' VDC LIFE CYCLE CONTACT MATERIAL 0.000.000 CYCl *. A* . RHODIUM V AND 200 MA CONTACT RESISTANCE SHOCK MAX. VIOHATlON MAX TEMPERATURE 0.00 M. OHMS 30G TEST I'Ll .*7 :r rc/E ?t:r . OG TEST f'L- M . *i ,:;i 2ioa - 40 C TO 125 ( 7/\rnr^* A r nnnif**-*1 i* *4 and acLi** r. * ****** t*# u%^v; uv* 1000 diroci pKIiivj contaciG. wfterotty fic an: nol `"*u > t*nj A.w^tjri c> rx3c.no/ light,, relays or programmers, etc - t 0`< on < A, 11 .11 Af.U LO'* *'. *UST 1000 REED SWITCH TEST 200 MA. 200 VOLTS. A.C. c i.' a u fAAX / / 'min. 10' 10* 10' 2.25 CYCLE LIFE -- SNAP RING RCVERGAflLE NORM OPEN NORM. CLOSED r<VQlnt WHEN SWITCHING high INDUCTIVE loads, consult factory for Priori * RECOMMENDATIONS AND/OR TESTING THE COMPAYABILITY OF COMPONENTS. f on c ustom and.qr military applications, contact factory file SSfI9 161211 Stainless Steel Level Sensor -------- 1.15-------- -- APPROVED PURIFICATION CORPORATION STAMFORD. CT (203) 357-0141 FAX (203) 356-1697 D0 A 13491S CONFIDENTIAL A~JT^ *' SEAL INDICIA. BUNA N - NO NUMBER & z*/ LIQUID LEVEL GAGE TJ BACK MOUNT NEWM \.62 "B" / T 1/2-20 UNF-2A OPTIONS EPDM seals - Specify -4 in place of -1 or -3 in catalog number. 5/8-18 mounting studs - Specify -5 after seal number. #Blue fluid In thermometer - Specify "B" after seal number. 5/8 thread and blue fluid - Specify 5/8B after seal number. Back mounting gage Is the moat pop ular of the card thermometer gages. It has the lowest profile with a vide sight opening to maximize viewing and Is tamper resistant in the field. Pyrex sight Is crystal clear and has no Initial color or tint of Its own. It does not change color due to Immersion In fluid, time or temperature. It Is not affected by hydraulic fluids. iipii Access to reservoir Interior Is necessary to tighten nuts supplied with gage. Spacer sleeves avail able to apace gage away from reser voir and conical sleeves for cylindrical tanks. #20 psl maximum pressure. # 250* F. maximum temperature. To order: Select catalog number C1620-10-A-1 J" Buna N seals -- Aluminum const. ------------10" centers ------------------- Cage series Q_ BUNA N SEALS - NO INDICIA. CATALOG NO. "A" "B" "C" G1620-03-A-1 G1620-05-A-1 G1620-10-A-1 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.50 10.00 8.50 4.62 6.62 11.62 VITON A SEALS (3) INDICIA. G1620-03-A-3 G1620-05-A-3 G1620-10-A-3 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.50 10.00 8.50 4.62 6.62 11.62 LIQUID LEVEL GAGE BACK MOUNT WITH CARD THERMOMETER F 32 7-1620*. OLUBE DEVICES OFFERS THE LARGEST SELECTION OF LIQUID LEVEL OBSERVATION DEVICES IN THE HYDRAULIC ACCESSORY INDUSTRY. THERE ARE 24 SERIES OF CLOSED CIRCUIT LIQUID LEVEL GAGESj 15 STYLES OF VENTED OIL GAGES AND 9 TYPES OF LUBESIGHT CHECK GAGES (ALSO CALLED SIGHT PLUGS OR OBSERVATION WINDOWS) ASK FOR CATALOG LL0989. 00 A 134916 CONFIDENTIAL. Parker Maintenance Instructions For Hydraulic Accumulators Installation Most accumulators shipped from the factory will not be pre-charged. However, in some cases they will be shipped with some amount of nitrogen charge, the value of which will be stamped on the nameplate. Keep the hydraulic port covered to keep out foreign material until ready to make the hydraulic connections. The accumulator can be mounted in any orientation. However, it should be rigidly mounted using any combination of the mounting holes provided at the hydraulic cap or proper clamps. The hydraulic circuit, which contains a connection to the accumulator should be designed so that it automatically .4 discharges all hydraulic fluid from the accumulator when the equipment is turned off. .r-f 2- ^ -z *7 i Z.& For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. OO A 1 3491,7 CONFIDENTIAL 32 r i c*wi sen tjii Us an inert gas such as nitrogen for pre-charging accumulators. If water pumped nitrogen is not available, oil-pumped nitrogen may be used. (C.G.A. standards: Nitrogen gas bottles for water pumped nitrogen has a right-hand valve thread which requires charging and gauging assembly 1445950000 for units up to 3000 psi. Oilpumped nitrogen requires a left-handed valve thread (Use 1445960000). For accumulators rated over 3000 psi up to 5000 psi, use assembly #1449120000 (See Figure 3). If equipment other than the above listed is used, make sure it is compatible with the gas valve assembly. Nitrogen source and all components must be rated for a pressure at least as high as the nitrogen source. It is strongly recommended that the nitrogen bottle used have a high pressure regulator. Make sure nitrogen supply is shut off. Attach hose to nitrogen bottle. If accumulator has a gas valve as shown in Figure 5 follow steps A thru J and skip steps AA thru HH. If accumulator has a gas valve as shown in Figure 6. skip steps A thru J and follow steps AA thru HH. Accumulator having gas valve as per Figure 5. (A) Remove gas valve guard and gas valve cap. second wrench. This will open the poppet inside the gas valve. Note: four (4) turns will fully open the valve. (DD) Crack open nitrogen bottle valve and slowly fill accumulator. Shut off when gage indicates desired pre-charge. (EE) Let the pre-charge set for 10 to 15 minutes. This will allow the gas temperature to stabilize. If the desired pre-charge is exceeded, close nitrogen bottle valve, then slowly open bleed valve until desired pressure is reached (Figure 3). (FF) With a wrench, tighten hex nut at point "D" to close internal poppet (5-8 ft. lbs.). (GG) Hold gas valve at point "C" with wrench and remove swivel -nut assembly. (HH) When pre-charging has been completed. replace gas cap and tighten (10-15 in. lb ), install gas valve guard. BLEED VALVE - T handle - GAS CHUCK -- SWIVEL NUT -- m KZ7 X ZJSl^ (B) Back gas chuck T handle all the way out (counter clockwise) before attaching charging assembly to accumulator gas valve. (C) Close bleed valve fD) Making sure not to loop or twist the hose, attach swivel nut to gas valve and tighten (10-15 in. lb.) (E) Turn gas chuck "T handle all the way down. This will depress core in gas valve. (F) Crack open nitrogen bottle valve and slowly fill accumulator. Shut off when gage indicates desired pre-charge. PART* 144595 0000 PARK 085122 0000 FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 W PSI UNITS ft kvmMr I Cn*r<pAg **0 Gag*ng Atsamoiv tor 3000 PS' 144*96 0000 (Stai Hanoi Charing and Gaging Auem&ty consuls of 10 Charging ho** with Standard ngni-nano mraao nitrogen fitt*g* adapter incorporating gat >* o**0*r vatv* and gas cnoc* (tats 9*9*1 >0' th hand mreao nitrogen oomt fittng specify pari nufno*r 1*4596 0000 PaM Numo*r 065172 0000 G*gng Aaaembty for 3000 PSi G*g*ng datnc* consisting of adapter incorporating gas vaive breeder *aiv and g*s Choc* nasi gagei (G) Let the pre-charge set for 10 to 15 minutes. This will allow the gas temperature to stabilize. If the desired pre-charge is exceeded, close nitrogen bottle valve, then slowly open bleed valve (Figure 1). Do not reduce pre-charge by depressing valve core with a foreign object. High pressure may rupture rubber valve seat. (H) When finished pre-charging accumulator, turn 'T' handle all the way out on gas chuck (Figure 1), then open bleed valve, (I) Hold gas valve for turning, loosen swivel nut, remove assembly. (J) Replace gas valve cap (10-15 in. lbs.) and valve guard. Accumulator having gas valve as per Figure 6. bleed valve SWIVEL NUT part* 14*9120000 part# 144961 0000 dan Number 144912 0000 Part Number 144961 0000 FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 WOO PSI UNITS Charging and Gaging Assembly for 5000 PSI Charging and Gaging Aaaambiy consuls of W charging hos* with standard ngnt-hano ihrtad nitrogen finings (1,035-14 NGO tamate) adapter incorporating gas vaiv* bieadar valve and gas chuck (toss gaga) Gaging Aaaambiy for 5000 PSf vaiv* and gas chuck (lass gags) 134918 (AA) Remove gas valve guard and gas valve cap. (BB) Close bleed valve and making sure not to loop or twist the hose, attach swivel nut to gas valve and tighten (10-15 in. lb.). (CC) Hold gas valve at point "C" with one (1) wrench while unscrewing hex nut at point "D" with a 1 1I r * PART# $32364 0000 Gas valve with high pressure core lor 3000 psi service FIGURE S POINT "D" POINT 'C" C o -ACCUMULATOR , I 1 PART* 612433 0000 Ges Valve with poppel lor ASME units 7.9. 12 Bore end ell 5000 psi units FIGURE 6 Cylinder Dlvlelon 500 So Woll Road Des Plaines. IL 60016 706/298-2400 Regional plant* a Santa Fa Spnngs, CA 310/696-0665 , Enlleld. CT 203/749*2215 Atlanta, GA 404/349*0563 Goodland, IN 21&/297-3162 m Plymouth. Ml 313/455-1700 Hillsborough, NC (Aceum) 010/732-6163 Hillsborough. NC 019/732-9371 Akron. OH 216/253-4500 Portland, OR 503/265*0664 Owen Sound. Ont. Can $19/371-2662 Toronto. Ont. Can 416/255*4597 a Lachina. Quaboc. Can 514/631-3995 Motion & Control 3 Maintenance Repair Kits, (see Parts List), are available for all accumulator models. When ordering repair kits, state complete model number from nameplate. Also specify fluid and temperature at which used. Occasional replacement of v-o-ring seal on the piston is generally the only maintenance required. Replacement of other seals on end caps and gas valve is recommended (See kit numbers). Periodic checking of pre-charge pressure will detect whether v-o-ring wear is sufficient to begin reducing sealing performance. Allowing for temperature difference, if any, from time of its pressure checking, pre-charge pressure will rise if oil gathers in the gas side and will fall if gas leaks into the oil side or out past gas end seals. It is suggested that a check be made a week after installation, and thereafter once a month. Pre-charge Checking Procedure Using appropriate valve in the hydraulic system, discharge all oil from accumulator and allow piston to bottom against hydraulic end cap. For accumulators rated for 3000 psi or less use gaging assembly as shown in Figure 2 (Part #0851220000). For accumulators rated over 3000 psi up to 5000 psi use assembly as shown in Figure 4 (Part #1449610000) Accumulators having gas valve as per Figure 5 (1) Remove gas valve guard and gas valve cap, (2) Back gas chuck T handle all the way out (counter clockwise) before attaching charging assembly to accumulator gas valve. (3) Close bleed valve. (4) Attach swivel nut to gas valve and tighten (10-15 in.lb.) (5) Turn gas chuck "T" handle all the way down This will depress core in gas valve and check pressure (6) To remove gaging assembly turn *T' handle all the way out on gas chuck (Figure 1), then open bleed valve. (7) Hold gas valve from turning, loosen swivel nut, remove assembly. (8) Replace gas valve cap (10-15 in.lbs.) and valve guard. Accumulators having gas valve as per Figure 6. (9) Remove gas valve guard and gas valve cap. (10) Close bleed valve. (11) Attach swivel nut to gas valve and tighten (10-15 in,lb.). (12) Hold gas valve at point "C" with one (1) wrench while unscrewing hex nut at point "D" with a second wrench. This will open the poppet inside the gas valve. Turn 2-3 times and read precharge. (13) With a wrench, tighten hex nut at point "D" to close internal poppet (5-8 ft. lbs.). (in/ noiu yas vdive at poiiu u , wmi wienui anu remove swivel nut assembly. (15) Replace gas cap and tighten (10-15 in.lb.), and install gas valve guard. Remove From Hydraulic System Shut equipment down and make certain that hydraulic pressure at the accumulator is at zero. At this point the piston will be bottomed at the hydraulic end. For accumulators having gas valve as shown in Figure 5, attach gaging assembly as shown in Figure 2 following Steps 1 thru 5. Then, open bleed valve until all gas pre charge is relieved from accumulator. Then remove gaging assembly and gas valve. For accumulators having gas valve as shown in Figure 6, remove gas valve guard and gas valve cap. Then hold valve at point "C" with one (1) wrench while unscrewing hex nut at point "D" with a second wrench. Wait until all gas pre-charge is relieved from the accumulator and then remove gas valve. Remove accumulator from hydraulic system. Threaded holes in hydraulic cap may be used as a means of attachment for lifting, or use a sling around the body. Disassembly of Accumulator Lay the accumulator horizontal and hold down with a strap wrench or in a vise. Some accumulators may have both end caps threaded into the body and some units may only have the gas cap threaded into the body. IN BOTH CASES ALWAYS REMOVE THE GAS CAP FIRST (end cap which contained gas valve). To remove cap or caps, install tnree (3) pins into the holes in the cap, then using a long bar working against the pins unthread the cap from the body Remove o-nngs and back-up rings from end cap Remove piston by pushing from hydraulic end with a bar NEVER TRY TO REMOVE PISTON BY APPLYING COMPRESSED AIR AT OPPOSITE END. To remove vo-nng from piston, lift seal with small smooth screw driver or similar tool, moving the tool around the piston several times while using the other hand to work ring off the piston. Cleaning Thoroughly clean metal parts in solvent and dry with compressed air. Clean bore of body with a clean lint-free cloth soaked in clean solvent. Bore must be clean of any visible particles or particles detectable to touch. Inspection Inspect piston for cracks, burrs around o-ring grooves, or damage. Examine body bore, using a light, for scratches or scoring. Inspect end caps for damaged threads or buns on o-ring grooves. Repair and Replacement Minor nicks, scratches or light scoring of the body bore can be removed by using crocus cloth. Dress bore until all apparent imperfections have been removed. Replace teflon wear rings, v-o-rings, o-rings and their respective back up washers if the original assembly contained them. For additional information - call your local Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. do a CONFIDENTIAL Reassembly Coat all internal parts with clean hydraulic fluid before reassembly. With new v-o-ring and Teflon rings on piston, install piston, hollow side toward gas end, in bore of body. Do not let v-o-ring drag on threads. Piston must go into bore exactly square and very slowly. (V-o-ring will compress as it rides up the chamfer if done slowly, but may be damaged if forced quickly.) Piston will fit snug. Use hammer and wood block to tap piston into place until all of piston is 2 inches below beginning of honed bore. Keep force against piston while tapping v-o-ring through the bore chamfer, otherwise piston will bounce back, damaging the o-ring. Cover port opening to keep out dirt. Parts List Install new back-up ring first, then a new o-ring on threaded end cap or caps and install into body bore. Care should be exercised not to drag o-ring over threads. End cap will stop against chamfer leading into honed bore (extreme tightness not required -- o-ring sealing is not dependent upon cap tightness). Cap should be flush with end of body within 1/16" to 3/32" above or below. Install gas valve after replacing the o-ring. Remount accumulator and connect to hydraulic system. Pre-charge accumulator using procedure outlined on page 2 (where space is a problem it may be necessary to pre-charge accumulator before connecting it to the hydraulic system). Per* Gas Cac J VO-N*sq S* " v-O-Amg6ac*4*0*urwrs 6 Tenon Amq tPf*toni * O-Ang 0-A*Q&fte*-upwavr a Gas vmw Ba Cm V*rve O-R-ng 9 Gas va* Guard 9a Sera* "NgtttfM <r>r 4 V V< tartM ron 00*9 yrv* asm irm r oofinn fWed MM 3000 up 0 MOD mm *mm vpnep*' fagis* lonorngiJ iRen He 61743000001 Omer mm hM gas ** pm fgurt $ on o*g 7 fhfl M23HI IT end CP*** gas * cprt Ran No KTT^XXi: Use loo* (Pan no $62441QQ0Qi to rappee nr* cora A WARNING *A4i*c o* ntpftopcn selection or improper use of the products *0 OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL MJURT AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. doci^nenf and other n*ofm*t>on from Ranter Hannifin Corporation, it) subsidiaries ana tumoriied distributors provide product Sna/or system options tor lunner investiga tion bv wt*n having technical expertise It is important mat you analyze all aspects of yowr oooKMitt* *KiuC>nq consequences of any laifure ano review tnt information concerning me ROdwCf or system m |h* current product catalog Due to the variety 0> Operating cono<i*na ano eponcatipn* lor mine products or systems the user through its own ana>v)i *no testing n sowy responsible lor making the final selection of the products and Htmi #no assuring dial as performance, safety and warning requirements ot me eopittilion are met Tn products desenoed herein, including without timitaeon product features. ipeciHcaiiont designs evaitaDnity and pricing are suOrect to change by Rafter Hanmim Corporation ang its subsidiaries af any lime without notice Maief.ji Z" fSianderd) Bun*.*) V.ton EpR 592850KOOO 5928506000 5920500000 Carporyiaied Nilni^s 59285QJ000 Low Temp Nhnif. S9205OOOOO 4'1 50285 JKOOO 592851E00O 592851D000 59285IJ000 59285IOOOO Bore SU 5-3/4 666025M 000 6660756000 6660250000 666O25JC00 6660250000 r 656IOOKOOO 656100EQ00 6561000000 656iQQJ0Q0 6561000000 9 i '7 Titfirxooo 7160I7EOOO M60'TO0OC f'8'?*OO0 0I0I26EOOO 8*61260000 ndiTj00o 6(61263000 M60I70000 8161260000 D0 a 13*920 mNFTOFNT-lW- Cylinder Division 500 So Wolf Rosa Dm Pismsi. IL $0016 708/296-2400 Rsglonsl Plant, a Santa Fa Springs. CA 310/6964)965 a Enhatd. CT 203/749-2215 a Atlanta. GA 404/3494)563 a Goodiand. IN 219/297*3162 a Plymouth. Ml 313/455-1700 a Hiilaborough. NC 919/732-6183 a HtllsOorough, NC 919/732-9371 a Akron, OH 216/253-4500 a Portland, OR 503/2054)664 a Owsn Sound. Ont Can. 619/371-2662 a Toronto. Ont. Can. 416/255-4567 a Laetana, Ouabac. Can. 514/631-3996 Motion & Control Parts Id ntification and Maint nance Instructions Parker Series 3H, 7" & 8" Bore"11 Hydraulic Cylinders Parker Series 3H, 7" & 8" Bore Hydraulic Cylinders Parts Identification and Maintenance Instructions I a avaiiabta as a specie modification Sennet mwnaa6a pans *y ud po-e cywaw are twcead ei Dross vtoutrnti wot acmes taUSA andorwcot/ Fo* prompt oee.eiy eno complete ntonnatron oontaci you hm<mi hna Hanratm dabtoutor o> mnderd Beato -- Cass i Srvw Ms n sxanoam and comam Tenon* lm ana Pmnwmene mm Theta seed are uum io< um when nyoratAc |nm tyoei m me opertimg maun Parts Identification 1 rll Ul u Aoe Grand 40 Aoowpemeer 41 Rod LOSMI Ena Seal Baca Up Washer S Grend to need O-flmg 47 End Seel O-Amg h* las at 42 11* 120 121 Deoertpw. Pan* Amg Grand Cervtdgs Aasamot Outs' Ang kvter Ang Weer Ang Class 1 Hydraulic Service Only* Gland Cartridge Kits (Sym. #42) Red Ota. r 3V 4` 4V S' 5V Ctaaa 1 (Std.) Bune4T (Nftrtia 4 Polyurethane RG2HLTS30I RG2HLTS3S1 RG2HLTS401 RG2HLTS451 RQ2HLTSS01 RG2HLTS551 'For other classes of service. rater to Bulletin 0SS5-M3C. Rod Seal KNa Class 1 (Std.) Bune-N (NhrUs) 4 Potyurethena RK2HL.TS301 RK2HLTS351 RK2HLTS401 RK2HITS451 RK2HLTSS01 RK2HLTS551 m .*** I opmwg temperature range lor Class 1 seals B -10*F (-23*0) t ZTCi la 15 Seneca Kat contain vnon aeelt and are espeoafty i aannca or tor some lire resistant fk* (tor i e< aarant catalog oonauli factory) Vhon teats (Class 5) I tar tantoareture aarvioa wtttwt a temperature range or 10*F (.tr*Ci Vaon seats may be operated to *400*F (+204*C) i m For temperatures above +25C*F (+120*C) the cylinder I ardh a pnted piston to rod connection. rod to pmon weeded connection secured with an MtMi temperature eanamve Cytandett apecthed ertth vtton PM aMi anearopn; aomeive having a maximum operating P *t6S*F (74*C) These temperature kmitaeona are V* poasbte loosening of the threaded connections manutoehsed with Class 1 seals (Buns-N) that wM be temperatures above +165*F (+74*C) must be modified for service Contact the tectory townedietely and arrange for the ttored and the etod to pttton rod connecbons to be property la-aeeembted I tie higher temperature aamoa. tdfh Walti ConMnt Fluid -- Class 6 Service Kits contain specialty (UIVCWOM HWB setts lor Htjyi Water Content Fluid Servtoe. These eeels can alto be weed amen hydraiiic oil la the operating me(lium. The reoommended Opening temperature tor Class 6 teals to +40*F (+4*C) to +1S5*F <+74'C). I tradename of El. OuPont da Nemours & Co. Inc. Cylinder Body Seal KH Pteton Baal KRst Bon Stoe 7 4 CB Inctudes 2 ee. Symbol 47424 CB7D3H0001 C8609H0001 PR Inoiudae lee. Sym. 47 4 Bi 4ae.Bym.4B PR703H0001 PR403H0001 Ht-Uwd 2M.ByM^4474 1*1 ilea. TIP 4120 PK70SHKD01 PKB09HK001 tCB. PR 4 hMoed piston teal Mi pert number* shown HenOfy CtoM t. 2 4 aervloa only, fo orter Ctaaa aeeit sitoettbile 5 tor Via last OgR of Wt mtttoes * For additional information - call your local D0 a i Parker Fluidpower Motion & Control Distributor. rconf t of 1nt A 2 Parker Series 3H, 7" & 8" Bore Hydraulic Cylinders Parts Identification and Maint nanc Instructions To Service R d Gland Seals -- The rod gland cartridge, Symbol 62, is removable without disassembly of the cylinder on all Senes 3H 7" & 8"bore hydraulic cylinders. To remove the gland, loosen the retainer screws and remove the gland retainer. It is recom mended that the used gland be replaced by a complete gland cartridge kit, Symbol 62. Later the used gland can be inspected, and if the bearing surface is still satisfactory and not out-of-round, it can be repacked with replacement seals and stored for future use. Assemble seals for the Series 3H 7" & 8" bore gland by installing the rod wiperseal and rod lipseal in their proper grooves. Install head-to-gland *0* ring in its proper groove. Lubricate all seals. THE SEALS ARE PRESSURE-ACTUATED, SO NO FURTHER ADJUSTMENTS ARE NECESSARY. To Service The Piston Seals -- Disassemble the cylinder com pletely; remove the old seals and clean all of the parts. The cylinder bore and the piston should then be examined for evidence o< sconng. If either is damaged, it should be replaced The piston seal is either cast iron nngs. or hi-load Teflon* type iron piston nngs seldom need replacement. If tne nngs show no signs of damage or abnormal wear, they may be reused To install piston and nngs. collapse the nngs one at a time, while inserting me piston mto the cylinder body, using a light oil to aid this process The N-toad piston is supplied with one continuous Teflon outer rmg Symbol 119. which is preloaded by a synthetic rubber inner nng Symbol 120 and two split tabnc-phenolic wear nngs. Symbol 121 To service the hi-toad piston, remove old seals ana wear nngs and clean all piston surfaces Install the inner nng m groove as shown Install the wear nng m the longer groove at each ana of piston, also as shown Heat the Teflon outer nng in boiling water and stretch it by hand until it will fit over the O.D of me wear nng Push outer nng over the wear nng and into the seal groove. With outer ring in its groove, compress it with ring compressor or use a starting sleeve having an I.D. same size as cylinder bore and tapered at one end. To Replace Piston -- If the piston or piston rod is badly scored or otherwise damaged, they should be replaced as a complete assembly. To order a piston and rod assembly, specify serial number, bore size, stroke and model number as shown on the cylinder name plate. Cylinder Reassembly -- O-rings, Symbol 47, and back-up washers, Symbol 26, should be lightly coated with lubricant, then worked into place into the cap by hand. Cylinder body can then be assembled to the cap by rocking it down over the seal until the end of the cylinder body is metal-to-rnetal contact with the cap. Install O-nng, Symbol 47, and back-up washers. Symbol 26, in head Head is then fitted over the piston rod and assembled to cylinder body. Rock gently into place until body and head are in metal-to-metal contact. install tie rods in holes provided in cap and thread them into the tapped holes m the head On cap end mounting styles the tapped holes are m the cap Install the tie rod nuts and tighten finger tignt inspeci me surface of the piston rod for scratches, dents, raised burrs or other damage A damaged piston rod will quickly ruin any seal through which it moves and should be replaced. Slide tne giand with its seals over the piston rod until it seats against me cavity m me head install tne gland retainer and retainer screws Torque tne be rod nuts to the torque level shown in Table A beiow Torque me gland retainer screws to the torque level shown m Table B below `Teflon is a registered trademark of E I duPont oe Nemours & Co . Inc A WARNING failure or improper selection OR improper use of the PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. This document and Other information trom Parker Hannifin Corporation, its SubSKkanes and authorized distributors provide product and/or system option* lor lunher investigation by users having technical expertise It is important mar you anatyz* all aspects ot your application, including consequences ol any failure and review the information concerning me product Or system in me Current product catalog. Out 10 the variety ol operating conditions and applications lor these product* or systems, the user, through rts own analysis and lasting, it solely responsible lor making the final selection ol the products and systems assuring that all performance, salary and warning requirements ot the application are met. The products Oesenbed herein, including without limitation, product features, specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by Parker Hannifin Corporation and Its subsidiaries at any time without notice Table A Tie Rod Nut Torque -- Foot Pounds Series 3H. 7* & B" Bore Cylinders Cylinder Bore r 8* Fl Lbs 790 1160 Table B Retainer Bolt Torque For Cylinders with Round or Small Square Gland Retainer Bolt Die. Torque 3/16' V4` IS In. Lb*. 60 In. Lbs. 5/16* 3/8" 7716' 10 Ft. Lbs. 20 Ft. Lbs. 35 Ft. Lbs. Cylinder Division 500 So. WOII Road Des Plaines. IL 50016 705/296-2400 Regional Plante e Santa Fe Springs, CA 3)0/695-0965 a Enheld. CT 203/749-2215 a Atlanta, GA 404/349-0563 a Goodland. IN 219/297-3182 a Plymouth. Ml 313/455-1700 Hillsborough. NC 919/732-6183 e Hillsborough. NC 919/732-9371 e Akron, OH 216/253-4500 Portland. OR 503/205-0664 DO A 134922 CONFIDENTIAL Owen Sound. Ont Can. 519/371-2662 a Toronto. Onl. Can. 416/255-4567 Lachtne. Quebec. Can. 514/631-3995 Merton & Control